TransCore 05531 LMS TRANSMITTER User Manual E4 SG

TransCore LMS TRANSMITTER E4 SG

UserManual.wiki >

TransCore >

05531 User Manual

USERS MANUAL

TransCore

3410 Midcourt Road, Suite 102

Carrollton, Texas 75006

April 2008

P/N 412066

Encompass™4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

System Guide

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Information in this document is subject to change and does not represent a commitment on the part of

TC IP, Ltd.

and ENCOMPASS is a trademark of TC IP, Ltd., and are used under license. All other trademarks listed are

the property of their respective owners. Contents are subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.

Products covered by this document are protected by one or more of the following U.S. patents 4,739,328;

4,782,345; 4,786,907; 4,816,839; 4,853,705; 4,864,158; 4,999,636; 5,030,807; 5,528,222; 5,550,547;

5,606,323; 5,673,037; 5,889,489; 5,912,632; 5,942,987; 6,097,347; 6,121,880; 6,275,157; 6,975,228; and

foreign equivalent patents. Other patents pending.

For further information, contact:

TransCore

3410 Midcourt Road, Suite 102

Carrollton, Texas 75006 USA

Phone: (214) 461-4031

Fax: (214) 461-6478

Technical Support

Phone: (800) 755-0378

Web: transcore.com/rfidsupport

For comments or questions about this document, e-mail tech.pubs@transcore.com.

WARNING TO USERS IN THE UNITED STATES

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

LOCATION AND MONITORING SERVICE STATEMENT

47 CFR §90.351

NOTE: The user is required to obtain a Part 90 site license from the FCC to operate this radio frequency

identification (RFID) device in the United States. See product label for FCC ID number. Access the FCC

Web site at www.fcc.gov/Forms/Form601/601.html for additional information concerning licensing

requirements.

NOTE: Users in all countries should check with the appropriate local authorities for licensing

requirements.

FCC RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

47 CFR §15.105(a)

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate RF energy and may cause harmful interference to radio communications if

not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual. Operating this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case, depending on the laws in effect, the user may be

required to correct the interference at their own expense.

NO UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS

47 CFR §15.21

CAUTION: This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without permission

from TransCore, LP. Unauthorized modification may void the equipment authorization from the FCC and

will void the TransCore warranty.

USE OF SHIELDED CABLES IS REQUIRED

47 CFR §15.27(a)

NOTE: Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to comply with FCC regulations.

TransCore, LP

USA

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Health Limits (865 to 875 MHz)

Within the United States, environmental guidelines regulating safe exposure lev-

els are issued by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

Section 1910.97 of OSHA Safety and Health Standards 2206 legislates a maxi-

mum safe exposure limit of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm2) aver-

aged over 6 minutes at 865 MHz.

Although not binding, other organizations such as the American National Stan-

dards Institute (ANSI) have issued similar guidelines that are more restrictive than

the OSHA limits (ANSI C95.1). ANSI guidelines recommend a maximum safe

power density in mW/cm2 of:

Frequency (in MHz)

1500

Thus, the maximum permissible exposure for general population/uncontrolled

exposure at 865 MHz is 0.58 mW/cm2. The power limit is a six-minute average.

The RF power density generated by the Encompass™ 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader was calculated using a maximum antenna gain of 9.5 dBi, equivalent to

the antenna gain of the internal antenna.

Warning

At 2 W transmitted power and a distance of 19.7 inches (50 cm) from the reader,

the maximum power density calculated was less than 0.58 mW/cm2. Install the

reader at least 19.7 inches (50 cm) from the general public. Maintenance per-

sonnel must remain at least 9.1 inches (23 cm) from reader when system is oper-

ating.

The data confirms that the TransCore Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

effectively meets OSHA requirements and thus does not represent an operating

hazard to either the general public or maintenance personnel.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Health Limits (902 to 928 MHz)

Within the United States, environmental guidelines regulating safe exposure levels are

issued by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

Section 1910.97 of OSHA Safety and Health Standards 2206 legislates a maximum

safe exposure limit of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm2) averaged over 6

minutes at 902 MHz.

Although not binding, other organizations such as the American National Standards

Institute (ANSI) have issued similar guidelines that are more restrictive than the

OSHA limits (ANSI C95.1). ANSI guidelines recommend a maximum safe power

density in mW/cm2 of:

Frequency (in MHz)

1500

Thus, the maximum permissible exposure for general population/uncontrolled expo-

sure at 902 MHz is 0.60 mW/cm2. The power limit is a six-minute average.

The RF power density generated by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader was

calculated using a maximum antenna gain of 9.5 dBi, equivalent to the antenna gain of

the internal antenna.

Warning

At 2 W transmitted power and a distance of 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the reader, the

maximum power density calculated was less than 0.60 mW/cm2. Install the reader at

least 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the general public. Maintenance personnel must

remain at least 8.66 inches (22 cm) from reader when system is operating.

The data confirms that the TransCore Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader effec-

tively meets OSHA requirements and thus does not represent an operating hazard to

either the general public or maintenance personnel.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Contents

vii

Contents

Health Limits (865 to 875 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Health Limits (902 to 928 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

1 Introduction

Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

System Guide Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Licensing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2 Developing the Site Plan

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reading of Mixed Population Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reader and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Antenna Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AA3100 Yagi (without radome) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AA3101 Yagi (with radome). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3110 Parapanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3140 PCB Log Periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3153 Toll Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Antenna and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

viii

Site Layout and Traffic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Other Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers in the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Lane Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Gate with Center Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Parking Garage with Ticket Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Overhead Reader Installation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Lane Configurations for Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers Using an

External Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Gate with Center Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Parking Garage with Ticket Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Overhead Reader Installation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Existing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Electrical and Communications Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Power and Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Power Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Host Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Wiegand Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Input/Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Antenna Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

3 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Compatible Tag Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

TransCore’s eGo Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

eGo Plus Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Intellitag Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Mirror Post Attached to Headliner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Contents

Installing eGo License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Positioning eGo License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

eGo License Plate Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Installing Interior ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Positioning ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Interior Center Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Removing Interior ATA Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Installing ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Positioning ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Types of Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Alternate Mounting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Installation Procedures Using Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Removing Exterior Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

4 Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Materials Supplied by TransCore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Contents of Shipping Carton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Installation Accessory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Additional Materials Needed for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. . . . . . . 4-5

Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Using an Audible

Circuit Tester............................................................................................................4-5

Connecting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Connecting the AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Connecting the DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Connecting Communications for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface. . . . . . . 4-11

Bench Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Before Installation . 4-12

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader on Round Pole

or Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader on a Round Pole . . . . . . 4-14

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a Wall or Flat Surface 4-18

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Mounting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Mounting the Antenna Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Connecting the Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Connecting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to the PC . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Wiegand Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Sense Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Marking the Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

5 General Software Information

Command Entry Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Command Response Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Power Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Program Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Download Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Download Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Contents

Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Sign-On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Boot Failure Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Tag/Message Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

6 Communications Protocols

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Basic Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Error Correcting Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Basic Protocol and ECP Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Reader Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

ECP Host ACK/NAK Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Switch to Command Mode Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Host Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Reader Command Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Sample Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Reader Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Host Command Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Timing and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Wrong Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Incorrect CRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Illegal Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Receive Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Host-Addressed Failure Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Incorrect CRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Receive Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

ECP Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

CRC Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

7 Commands

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

xii

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Data Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

01 Switch to Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

05 Switch to Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Communications Port Control — Command Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

100N Select Baud Rate*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

101N Select Stop Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

102N Select Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Command Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

20 Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

21 Set Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

22 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Append Information — Command Group 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

30N Append Time and Date Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

ID Filtering — Command Group 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

40 Transmit All ID Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

43 Buffer All ID Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

451 Enable Wiegand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

453 Enable Tag Translation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

455 Enable Multi-tag Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

456 Enable eGo Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default) . . . 7-14

457 Disable eGo Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

47N Select Tag Mode** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

495 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

497 Enable Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Reader Status — Command Group 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

505 Display Software Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

506 Display Hardware Configuration Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Contents

xiii

520 Display Power Fail Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

521 Display Reader ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

522 Display Communications Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

524 Display Appended Information Status* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

525 Display Communications Protocol Status* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

526 Display I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

527 Display RF Status** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

529 Display Presence Input Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

530 Display RF0 Filter Status* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

532 Display Wiegand Mode Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

535 Display Buffer Control Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

537 Display Echo Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

540 Display Flash Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

543 Display Boot Checksum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

560 Request Sensor Status Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

570 Display Tag Mode Status** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

60NN Set Reader ID Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

610 Enable Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

611 Enable Error Correcting Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

614N Select Flow Control Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

6161 Enable Buffer Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Buffer Control Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

6170 Disable Echo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

620N Set Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

621 Predefined Output Control (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

63 Reset Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

640N RF Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

642NN Select RF Operating Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

644NN Set RF Attenuation** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

645NN Set Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Operating Range (Distance)** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

65 Reset Power Fail Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

66F Load Default Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

660 Test External RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

661 Display Diagnostic Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

664 Test Real-Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

667 Verify Boot ROM Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

668 Verify Flash Memory Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

xiv

669 Perform All Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

67N Set Output Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

692N Select RF Control Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

693N Select RF Timeout Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

694N Select Input Inversion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

695S...S Set Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

82N Select Input Status Change Report Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . 7-46

831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Flash Memory Control — Command Group 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

90 Load Program Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

91 Verify Flash Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

96 Erase Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

97 Perform Destructive Flash Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

99 Exit Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

8 Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Configuring the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

General Configuration Labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Default Operating Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Verifying Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Verifying Tag Read Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Configuring Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Appended Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

ID Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Reset Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Radio Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Host Controlling RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Continuous RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Sense Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Sense Output Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Serial Port Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Port Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Software Flow Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Contents

Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Antenna . . 8-20

Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Marketing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or Have

Suggestions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

A Glossary

B Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Hardware Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Physical Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Environmental Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

C Wiring Tables

Communications Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

RS–232 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

RS–422 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Wiegand Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Power Supply Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Low-Voltage DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

xvi

Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Summary Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

D Command Quick Reference

Command Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Numerical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

Alphabetical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16

E Compatible Tag Information

Tag Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Reader/Tag Interoperability (Needs to be updated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Tag Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7

Contents

xvii

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 2-1 Tag and Reader Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Location Relative to Tag Position . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-3 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Driver’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-4 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Passenger’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-5 Typical Tag Positions Used with Overhead Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figure 2-1 Horizontal and Vertical Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Figure 2-2 Antenna Location Relative to Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Figure 2-3 Gate Application with Center Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Figure 2-4 Parking Garage Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Figure 2-5 Overhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Figure 2-6 Gate Application with Center Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Figure 2-7 Parking Garage Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Figure 2-8 Overhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Figure 3-1 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-3 eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-5 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-6 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-7 Correct Mounting Location for LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-8 Correct Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-9 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-10 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-11 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-12 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Figure 3-13 Proper Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 3-14 Correct Exterior Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-15 Upper Placement In License Plate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-16 Obstruction-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-17 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Figure 3-18 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Figure 4-2 Back of Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Showing Antenna Connector . . 4-6

Figure 4-3 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-4 Back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-5 Factory-Mounted Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-6 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-7 The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Attached to the Pole

Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-8 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Position . . . 4-17

Figure 4-9 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-10 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader . .4-19

Figure 4-11 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-12 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-13 Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Assembly to Pole

Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

xviii

Figure 4-14 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Figure 4-15 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Installation with Overhead Antenna . .4-24

Figure 4-16 Sample Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Figure 4-17 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Figure 8-8 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader RF Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Contents

xix

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Table 2-1 Examples of Staggered Reader Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Table 2-1 Connector Cabling Accessory Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Table 2-2 Power Supply Current Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Table 2-3 Recommended Cable Length from Transformer to the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Table 2-4 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Table 2-5 Reader to Antenna Cable Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Table 3-2 eGo Tag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Table 4-1 Installation Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Table 4-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Table 4-6 Commands for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Table 4-7 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Table 4-8 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Table 4-9 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Table 4-10 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Table 7-7 Tag Read Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Table 7-10 Tag Read Mode Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Table 7-11 Flow Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Table 7-12 Output Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Table 7-13 RF Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Table 7-14 Select RF Frequency Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Table 7-15 RF Attenuation Command Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Table 7-16 Output Pulse Duration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Table 7-17 Presence Without Tag Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Table 7-18 RF Control Algorithm Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Table 7-19 Timeout Period Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Table 7-20 Input Inversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Table 7-21 Input Status Change Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Table 8-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Configuration Label Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Table 8-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . 8-4

Table 8-3 Command Sequence to Verify Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Table 9-1 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . C-10

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . C-11

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable. . . C-13

Table D-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . D-3

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed Numerically . . . . . . . . D-6

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically. . . . . . D-16

Table E-1 ATA Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Table E-2 eGo Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

Table E-3 Reader/Tag Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Introduction

1-3

Chapter 1

Introduction

This chapter is the introduction to this manual and provides information

pertaining to the audience, organization, document conventions, system

description, and license information for the Encompass™ 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader System.

Purpose

This guide provides site planning and testing, installing, and operating instructions for

TransCore’s Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System, a dual-protocol reader

that reads Intellitag®-based eGo protocol and American Trucking Associations

(ATA)/International Organization for Standardization (ISO) tag protocols. Before you

begin installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System, TransCore rec-

ommends that you read this entire manual.

Audience

This document is intended to be used by authorized TransCore Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader System dealers, installers, and service personnel. Because the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System has no operator- or end-user service-

able components or features, no end-user manual or operator guide exists. Once the

system is set up and tested by the authorized installer, Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader System operation requires no end-user intervention.

System Guide Organization

Note: TransCore offers the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader in two models:

one with an internal antenna and one that requires connection to an external antenna.

In this system guide, information and instructions for both Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader models are presented. Where separate sections dictate, a section

detailing one Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader model is followed immediately

with a section detailing the other reader model. In this system guide, the reader with

an internal antenna is listed first. In cases where the information does not warrant a

separate section, the addition of "...or antenna" distinguishes between the Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader models.

The chapters of this guide and a description of the contents are listed below.

•Chapter 1, “Introduction,” explains the purpose and describes the audience for the

guide, outlines the manual’s organization, provides a brief description of the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader system, and discusses Federal Commu-

nications Commission (FCC) licensing requirements.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

1-4

•Chapter 2, “Developing the Site Plan,” discusses factors to be considered when

developing the site plan and before ordering equipment and installing the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System. These considerations include reader or

antenna and tag alignment, site layout and traffic flow, and electrical and commu-

nications requirements.

•Chapter 3, “Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags,” contains information on

compatible tag models and provides procedures for installing tags onto, and

removing tags from, vehicles that use the facility where the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader System is installed.

•Chapter 4, “Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System,” lists

the materials needed and provides procedures to install the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader System. Steps include:

• Pre-testing

• Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System on a round

pole or flat surface

• Connecting power and communications

• Marking the read zone.

•Chapter 5, “General Software Information,” and Chapter 6, “Communications

Protocols,” provide reference information on various software-related topics and

communications protocols.

•Chapter 7, “Commands,” discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used

to control Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System configuration and

operation.

•Chapter 8, “Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System,”

provides procedures for configuring and fine-tuning the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader System after installing it at the site.

•Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting and Maintenance,” answers the most commonly

asked questions about installing and maintaining the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader System.

•Appendix A, “Glossary,” contains frequently used terms.

•Appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” provides the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader System specifications.

•Appendix C, “Wiring Tables,” shows the wiring connections for the communica-

tions interfaces, electrical cable connections, and the external interface signal

wiring.

•Appendix D, “Command Quick Reference,” lists the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader System factory default configuration settings and provides host

software commands in numerical and alphabetical order.

•Appendix E, “Compatible Tag Information,” provides helpful information about

tags that are compatible with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Sys-

tem.

Introduction

1-5

Typographical Conventions

The following conventions are used in this manual:

System Description

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System is a dual-protocol reader sup-

porting the low-cost, high-performance Intellitag® radio frequency identification

(RFID) technology. Intellitag technology provides the capability to read miniature

RFID tags in a myriad of options including rugged, durable, or thin flexible forms

such as the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader System also supports legacy transportation applications such as gated toll,

parking, or security gate access and is designed to be compatible with existing

TransCore SmartPass® parking access control applications certified for licensed use.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System supports the TransCore eGo and

TransCore ATA/ISO tag types.

Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions

Convention Indication

Concerns about a procedure.

Code Code, including keywords and variables within text and as

separate paragraphs, and user-defined program elements

within text appear in courier typeface.

Dialog Box Title Title of a dialog box as it appears on screen.

Menu Item Appears on a menu. Capitalization follows the interface.

Note Auxiliary information that further clarifies the current

discussion. These important points require the user’s

attention. The paragraph is in italics and the word Note is

bold.

NUL Zero-value ASCII character or a zero-value byte.

NULL Zero-value pointers. Null-terminated string refers to strings

of printable ASCII characters with a zero-value byte placed

in memory directly after the last printable character of the

string.

This procedure might cause harm to the equipment and/or

the user.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

1-6

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System is a full-frame high-power unit

that can read both half-frame and full-frame tags. The reader output power can be

adjusted using reader commands.

Reader

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System consists of an input/output (I/O)

module, a power supply, a reader logic board (also called a tag decoder), a radio fre-

quency (RF) transmitter/receiver (called the RF module), and a patch antenna.

A second version of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is designed to be

used with a high-performance external antenna. These Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader System components are contained in a highly reliable, compact, and easy-

to-install environmentally-sealed package. Figure 1-1 shows the front and side views

of an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System.

Figure 1-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Front and Side

Views

Tags

3-3

Chapter 3

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

This chapter describes the various tag types compatible with the

EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the procedures for

installing and removing compatible internal and external tags.

Compatible Tag Types

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader provides the capability to read the vari-

ous TransCore eGo tags and other American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANS INCITS 256-2001-compliant tags with Intellitag technology. Depending on

options ordered, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can read eGo tags as

well as TransCore IT2000 (in optional ATA/ISO mode), ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant

tags, and eGo Plus tags when they are programmed to operate in ATA mode. It can

also read tags formatted to a wide range of industry-standard proprietary formats,

including SIA Wiegand 26-bit standard format.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader reads only the various TransCore eGo

tags.

See Appendix E for information about the numerous ATA-protocol tag models.

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability

Table 3-1 lists the tags that are read by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

See http://www.transcore.com/pdf/Tag-Reader-Matrix.pdf for most current informa-

tion concerning readers and supported tag protocols.

Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Reader Beam Tags Battery Tags

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader AT5100; AT5102; AT5110;

AT5112; AT5125; AT5145;

AT5146; AT5715

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag;

eGo Tamper Resistant Tag; eGo

License Plate Tag

eGo Plus Sticker* Tag; eGo Plus

License Plate Tag*

other ANS INCITS 256-2001-

compliant tags with Intellitag

technology

AT5105; AT5114; AT5140;

AT5147; AT5510; AT5540;

AT5541; AT5542; AT5543;

AT5544; AT5545; AT5547;

AT5704; AT5707; IT2221**;

IT2235**

* in ATA and eGo modes ** When used in optional ATA/ISO

mode

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-4

TransCore’s eGo Tags

TransCore’s various eGo tags are offered to complete your Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader System.

Table 3-2 lists some of the features of the TransCore eGo tags.

Table 3-2 eGo Tag Features

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

The TransCore eGo Windshield Sticker Tag (Figure 3-1) is offered to complete your

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System. It is a flexible sticker much like a

vehicle registration sticker.

Figure 3-1 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

Tag Part

Number Used For Special

Features Power

Source

Number

of 6-bit

ASCII

Characters

Number

of 128-

Bit

Frames

Number

Wiegand

Bits

Windshield

Sticker Tag 13-0510-

004 Toll,

Electronic

vehicle

registration

(EVR),

mCommerce,

Parking,

Security

access

Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination

Beam 20 1 NA

10 1/2 26 to 54

License

Plate Tag 13-0510-

900 Water-

resistant,

exterior-

mounted

20 1 NA

10 1/2 26 to 54

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-5

eGo Plus Sticker Tag

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can also read the eGo Plus Sticker Tag

configured to support ATA or eGo modes.

Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag

eGo License Plate Tag

The eGo License Plate Tag (Figure 3-3) is a water-resistant tag used in applications

requiring an exterior-mounted eGo tag.

Figure 3-3 eGo License Plate Tag

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-6

Intellitag Data Format

The memory of Intellitag-based tags consists of 128 bytes of non-volatile read/write

memory. Portions of tag data, such as the tag serial number, manufacturing location

code, and tag hardware type, are programmed at the factory and locked. The tag mem-

ory layout may be programmed by the end user and may be kept unlocked if desired.

Of the 128 bytes of memory, 12 bytes are programmed and locked at the factory and

116 bytes of user memory are available to be formatted and locked as required by the

application. Six bytes of the available 116 bytes of user memory are used for defining

tag memory layout.

Tags can be programmed in Wiegand formats with 26 to 54 bits. Users who choose

this tag data format must complete a Wiegand format worksheet — attached to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader order entry form — indicating the data to be

programmed into the tags.

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

eGo Windshield Sticker Tags are designed to be attached by a semi-permanent adhe-

sive to the interior surface of nonmetallic windshields 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to

5.84 mm) in thickness. For optimum performance, you must install the tag at least 2

inches (5 cm) from the metal in the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9 cm) from the

rearview mirror support post. Detailed instructions are found in the pocket guide

"Quick and Easy Installation Instructions for Windshield Sticker Tag."

Some vehicles have a tinted area across the top of the windshield. If the tint is conduc-

tive, it can interfere with reading the tag. If a windshield has this conductive tint, the

tag must be installed at least 2 inches (5 cm) below this tinted area.

Some vehicle windshields contain a metallic treatment that could prevent an interior

windshield-mounted tag from being read. However, many of these metallized wind-

shields have areas that are not metallized. On a vehicle without open areas in its met-

allized windshield, you might need to install an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader-compatible license plate tag on the vehicle. See the section “Installing eGo

License Plate Tags” on page 3-9 and the section “Installing ATA License Plate Tags”

on page 3-15. Contact TransCore for more information. See the section “Technical

Support” on page 9-7.

eGo Plus Sticker Tags are positioned and installed similarly to eGo Windshield Sticker

Tags. Detailed instructions are found in the pocket guide "Quick and Easy Installation

Instructions for the eGo® Plus Sticker Tag."

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to install windshield sticker tags:

•Glass cleaner, mild detergent and water, or any cleaning solution appropriate for

your windshield

•Clean, dry cloth

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-7

•eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

TransCore designed the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag to be installed on the upper cen-

ter or upper corner portion of the windshield. Figures Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, and Fig-

ure 3-6 illustrate possible upper center tag placement locations. If the upper portion

of the windshield is tinted with an aftermarket conductive tint, use placement

Option B as shown in Figure 3-5.

Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield

Choose placement Option A shown in Figure 3-4 if the mirror post is attached low on

the windshield.

Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A

Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield

Choose placement Option B if the mirror post is attached high on the windshield as

shown in Figure 3-5 or if the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with a conduc-

tive tint.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-8

Figure 3-5 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B

Mirror Post Attached to Headliner

Choose placement Option C if the mirror post is attached to the headliner as shown in

Figure 3-6. If the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with an aftermarket

conductive tint, place the tag two inches (5 cm) below the tinted area.

Figure 3-6 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Installation Proce-

dures

Caution

Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The sticker tag may not

adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-9

To install the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement

guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags” on page 3-7.

2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the

rearview mirror where the tag will be located.

3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

4. Remove the paper backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Caution

Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the

sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges, position the tag in the correct area of the

windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented horizontally

and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9

cm) from the mirror post.

6. Press the sticker tag firmly against the glass and gently rub over the entire tag

surface. Ensure that no air bubbles remain between the sticker tag and the

windshield.

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags requires the use of a razor blade or equivalent

tool. The tag is inoperable once removed.

Installing eGo License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy

emitted by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, thus causing tags to be mis-

read. You must use exterior license plate tags on vehicles with metallized coatings on

their windshields and windows.

Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that

have this type of window coating.

Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader should

be adjusted accordingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the

read zone will be reduced.

Required Materials

•Screwdriver (flat-blade or Phillips depending on the vehicle’s license plate

mounting screws)

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-10

•Optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit (19077-01). This kit contains

tamper-resistant mounting screws and wrench.

•eGo License Plate Tag

Positioning eGo License Plate Tags

The eGo License Plate Tag (LPT) is installed over the license plate at the upper part of

the vehicle’s front license plate area.

Note: If your state does not require a front license plate, install the LPT in the area

where the license plate would normally be mounted. If your vehicle does not have a

front license plate area, contact your tag agency for other tag options.

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on

the tag base plate are on the top edge.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-11

eGo License Plate Tag Installation Procedures

To mount the eGo LPT

1. Remove the screws from the license plate area of your front bumper (Figure 1). If

your vehicle does not have mounting screws you will need two self-tapping

threaded screws. You can also contact the tag agency to inquire about the

optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit.

Note: You may need to use longer screws to fasten the LPT over the top area of your

license plate.

Figure 3-7 Correct Mounting Location for LPT

2. Position the LPT so that it is within 18 inches (46 cm) of the center of the front

bumper as shown by the shaded area in Figure 3-7. If your vehicle’s license plate

mounting area is more than 18 inches (46 cm) from the center, you may need to

select an alternate location to mount the tag. Contact your tag agency if your

vehicle requires an alternate mounting location for the LPT.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-12

3. Hold the LPT so that the etched lettering is facing you with the mounting holes to

the top as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Correct Tag Orientation

4. Fasten the LPT to the bumper using the license plate mounting screws

(Figure 3-9). Install the LPT over the top area of the vehicle’s license plate if your

vehicle has a front license plate. If your state does not require a front license

plate, install the LPT in the area where a license plate would normally be

mounted.

Figure 3-9 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-13

Installing Interior ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags are installed using hook-and-loop material or double-sided

tape attached to the tag and to the windshield. When using hook-and-loop material,

the loop material should be applied to the back of the tag and the hook material should

be applied to the windshield. After the tag is installed, it can be removed easily and

used in any vehicle that has corresponding hook material affixed to the windshield.

Note: Installing interior tags using double-sided tape results in a semipermanent

attachment; the tag will be more difficult to remove than one installed using hook and

loop material.

Interior ATA-protocol tags may be ordered from the factory with hook-and-loop

material or double-sided tape already applied to the tag. The adhesive on this material

is specially formulated for temperature extremes inside vehicles.

Required Materials

You will need the following materials to install interior tags:

•Rubbing alcohol or 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water

•Sponge and dry cloth

•Interior tags with two strips of factory-installed hook-and-loop material or fac-

tory-installed double-sided tape attached

Positioning ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags can be installed on the driver’s side, passenger’s side, or

upper center of the vehicle’s windshield, depending on the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader’s position. See “Reader and Tag Alignment” on page 2-4.

Tags should be mounted consistently in all vehicles using a particular Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader facility.

Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side

TransCore designed interior ATA-protocol tags for installation inside the vehicle, typ-

ically on the driver’s side of the windshield. Install the tag in the upper corner, at least

two inches (5 cm) from the metal window post, as shown in Figure 3-10.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-14

Figure 3-10 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location

Interior Center Windshield

You may also install ATA tags on the upper center portion of the windshield. Position

the tag as closely as possible to the windshield’s upper center, behind the rearview

mirror. The top edge of the tag should be approximately one inch (2.5 cm) below the

base of the mirror, or above the base if enough room is available for the tag to be two

inches (five cm) from metal around the windshield, as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location

ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures

Perform the following steps to install interior tags:

1. Clean the tag installation area on the interior surface of the windshield with

rubbing alcohol.

2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

3. Remove the clear backing from the two strips of hook-and-loop material on the

back of the tag (Figure 3-12) or from the double-sided tape.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-15

Figure 3-12 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag

4. Position the tag over the correct area of the windshield, making sure that the tag

and reader orientation are the same (horizontal or vertical).

5. Press the tag firmly against the glass.

Removing Interior ATA Tags

To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using hook-and-loop material,

simply pull the tag away from the windshield.

To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using double-sided tape, slowly pry

off the tag with a thin tool, such as a putty knife.

Installing ATA License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy

emitted by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, thus causing tags to be mis-

read. Use exterior license plate tags on vehicles with metallized coatings on wind-

shields and windows.

Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that

have this type of window coating.

Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader should

be adjusted accordingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the

read zone will be reduced.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-16

Exterior tags may be installed on metal or plastic bumpers using the existing license

plate bracket and hardware.

The tag can be mounted on the front bumper where the license plate is normally

located or mounted directly to the front license plate or license plate bracket. Once

installed, the face of the tag should be pointing directly forward or slightly upward. If

the bumper, license plate, or license plate bracket has any material that overhangs the

tag, the tag will not function properly.

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to install license-plate mounted tags:

•Exterior license plate-mount tag

•Two 0.25-inch (.63 cm) bolts and nuts (user-supplied). Length of the bolts can

vary depending on vehicle model.

•Screwdriver and wrench (user-supplied)

•0.25-inch (.63 cm) spacers or washers (if needed). Thickness of spacers can vary

depending on vehicle model.

Positioning ATA License Plate Tags

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on

the tag base plate are on the bottom edge. See Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Proper Tag Orientation

When positioning the tag, observe the following guidelines:

•The tag should be horizontal and parallel to the ground.

•The tag face should be perpendicular or tilted slightly upward.

• The tag may lean to the rear a maximum of 30 degrees.

• The tag may lean to the front a maximum of 10 degrees.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-17

ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures

To mount the license plate tag

1. Position the tag so that the holes in the tag are on the bottom edge and the tag is

within 18 inches (.45 m) of the center of the front bumper as illustrated by the

shaded area in Figure 3-14.

Note: When mounting an exterior tag on heavy trucks or tractors, the tag must

be mounted within 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) of the top of the bumper.

Figure 3-14 Correct Exterior Tag Placement

2. Line up the holes in the tag as follows:

• If mounting the tag to a license plate or license plate bracket, line up the

holes in the tag to the upper holes of the license plate or license plate

bracket.

Note: Do not mount the tag to the bottom holes of the license plate or license

plate bracket. The reflective material on the license plate may interfere with the

proper functioning of the tag.

• If mounting the tag to the bumper, line up the holes in the tag with the holes

in the front bumper where the license plate would normally be located.

See Figure 3-14.

3. Insert bolts through the tag base plate holes and the holes in the bumper or the

holes in the upper portion of the license plate area. See Figure 3-15.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-18

Figure 3-15 Upper Placement In License Plate Area

4. Make sure the area within 45 degrees of the center of the tag is free of

obstructions. See Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Obstruction-Free Area

5. Make sure that no material overhangs the tag. If overhang is more than ½ inch

(1.27 cm), insert spacers or washers directly behind the tag so that the tag is clear

of any overhanging obstruction. Secure the bolts with a nut. See Figure 3-17.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-19

Figure 3-17 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag

6. Tighten the bolts and nuts with a screwdriver and wrench to secure the tag to the

vehicle.

Types of Bumpers

When mounting tags directly to a bumper, consider the following factors:

•Tags can be mounted on any metal or non-metallic surface; composition of

bumper does not matter.

•Tags can be mounted to plastic bumpers using self-threading screws.

•Metal bumpers should be pre-drilled; self-threading screws may be used.

Alternate Mounting Locations

If the exterior type tag cannot be mounted on the license plate bracket or directly on

the bumper, it may be mounted on a relatively vertical front surface of the vehicle. The

exterior tag should be mounted as close to the bumper as possible, following all guide-

lines regarding orientation, obstruction, and overhang given for bumper mounting. For

applications where the integrity of the mounting surface cannot be compromised, the

exterior tag can be mounted on a smooth flat surface using double-sided tape.

Required Materials

Exterior tags need to be installed on a relatively flat surface. You need the following

materials to install exterior tags:

•Rubbing alcohol, 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water, or solvent/cleaner for metal

•Sponge and dry cloth

•Exterior tag with the double-sided adhesive tape attached

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

3-20

Installation Procedures Using Tape

To install the tag on a metal or plastic bumper

1. Clean and degrease the tag installation area of the vehicle bumper with solvent/

cleaner.

2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

3. Remove the backing from the double-sided tape on the back of the tag, as shown

in Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape

4. Position the tag over the installation area, making sure that the tag and

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader orientation are the same (horizontal or

vertical).

5. Press the tag firmly against the bumper.

Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets

To install an exterior tag using blind rivets through the tag’s installation

tabs

1. Position the tag on the bumper in the installation area and mark the hole positions

of the tag’s installation tabs on the bumper.

2. Follow the rivet manufacturer’s instructions to drill holes in the bumper for

rivets.

3. If the rivet head is smaller than the tag installation holes and can be pulled

through the holes, use a small washer to secure the rivet through the tag.

Removing Exterior Tags

To remove an exterior tag installed with rivets, follow the rivet manufacturer’s

instructions to remove the rivets.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

4-3

Chapter 4

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

This chapter lists the materials needed and presents the procedures to

pre-test and install the EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Installation Process

After you have developed the site plan and identified the location to install the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and antenna1, if required, you are ready to

install the equipment. Installation involves the following tasks:

•Pre-installation testing of Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader power and tag

read capability

•Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and antenna, if required,

on a pole, ceiling, or wall

•Connecting the antenna

•Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader power

•Marking the read zone

•Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol host and sense input/sense out-

put and communications

Materials Supplied by TransCore

You need the following materials to pre-test and install the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader. TransCore supplies some of the materials; other materials must be

obtained from other sources.

Contents of Shipping Carton

Ensure that you have received all parts before beginning your pre-installation Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader tests. Your Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader is packaged with the following materials:

•One Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

1. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is designed with an internal patch antenna

or with a RF cable connector for use with an external antenna. Unless noted in the text,

"antenna" refers to an "external antenna."

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-4

•One mounting bracket and the mounting hardware

•Any accessories ordered as options as shown in Table 4-1

Required accessories are a power/communications cable harness and a 110V AC wall

transformer or a 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer. If you are using an antenna

with the Encompass 4, you also require an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader-

compatible antenna and an antenna RF interface. These may be ordered as accessories

from TransCore or obtained from other sources.

Installation Accessory Options

Table 4-1 lists optional TransCore Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader installa-

tion accessory items.

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader may be ordered with a multwire

cable harness (part number 58-1620-001 or 58-1620-002 in Table 4-1) as a separate

accessory. On end has a waterproof connector for the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader, and the other end has 13 pairs of color-coded wires.

Additional Materials Needed for Testing

You need these additional materials to perform the pre-tests on the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader:

•Two test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

•Suitable 18V AC or 18V DC power wiring for the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader

•Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power

Table 4-1 Installation Accessories

Part No. Description

54-1620-001 Wall or ceiling mount kit

58-1620-001 5-ft connector cable harness

58-1620-002 20-ft connector cable harness

20-1620-003 Connector kit only

56-1620-004 13-pair cable (sold by the foot)

76-1620-005 110V AC to 18V AC Class C transformer

76-1620-006 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer

16-xxxx-001 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

(this manual)

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-5

•Wire stripper

•One Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader-compatible antenna (if required)

•Suitable RF interface coaxial cable (if using antenna)

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader

Before installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader permanently at the site,

you should use an audible circuit tester to confirm that the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader has power and can read a tag presented in the tag read zone.

Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester

An audible circuit tester is also called a buzz box. These boxes are available at some

electronic parts supply stores, or you can make a buzz box, as shown in Figure 4-1.

The buzz box is powered by a 9V DC battery and is equipped with two alligator-clip

leads. When you touch the leads together, the box makes an audible sound.

Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester

To test the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader that uses an internal antenna,

connect the power supply as described in the appropriate section below, and then test

as described in the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader Before Installation” on page 4-12.

To test the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader that uses an external antenna,

connect the antenna and connect the power supply as described in the appropriate sec-

tion below, and then test as described in the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader Before Installation” on page 4-12.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-6

Connecting the Antenna

Use these instructions to connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and

antenna.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect

the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Figure 4-2 Back of Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Showing Antenna

Connector

To connect the reader and antenna

1. Ensure the reader is turned off and unplugged.

2. Connect one end of the RF interface cable to the antenna.

3. Connect the other end of the RF interface cable to the antenna connector on the

back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. See Figure 4-1.

Connecting the AC Power Supply

Caution

If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect the antenna before applying power to the

reader.

To connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a low-voltage

AC power supply

1. Connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol power wires from the cable to the

transformer using the color coding as described in Table 4-2.

Antenna

connector

with RF cable

attached

Power/communica-

tions cable

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-7

2. Complete the power connections at the power supply.

Connecting the DC Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a low-voltage

DC power supply

Caution

If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect the antenna before applying power to the

reader.

1. Connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader power wires from the

cable to the low-voltage terminals using the connection designations shown in

Table 4-3.

Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Transformer

Terminal Strip

Wire Pair from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader Cable

Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red and

Orange/Red Orange and

Brown L1

(16 to 20V AC)

Main power return Red and Red L2

(16 to 20V AC)

Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connection Use

Wire Pair from

Encompass 4/

4800

Multiprotocol

Reader Cable

Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red and

Orange/Red Orange and

brown 16 to 28V DC+ terminal

Main power return Red and red 16 to 28V DC- terminal

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-8

Connecting Communications for Bench Testing

TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and

Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials

required for connecting the communications to perform pre-installation bench testing

of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:

•PC or laptop

•Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™

running on a PC

•Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader communications and customer interface sig-

nals are supplied from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to the host

through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair pigtail. The connector for this cable is

located on the back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Refer to the fol-

lowing sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from the cable to

the PC.

These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232 and RS–422 communica-

tions between the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the PC for bench test-

ing purposes. Each section contains wiring instructions and pin assignments followed

by step-by-step connection procedures.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can remain powered up while connect-

ing reader-to-host PC communications.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface

RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal to the

host male DB9 and DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-15.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-9

Figure 4-3 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors

Note: In Figure 4-3 supported pin assignments are in boldface.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-10

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Colored-Wire

Pair Cable

Table 4-7 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2

of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of

the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.

Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

output, host sense

input

Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

input, host sense

output

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

output, host sense

input

Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

input, host sense

output

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-11

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and

black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.

4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.

If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:

1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the

DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9

connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface

RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4/4800 Mul-

tiprotocol Reader communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface

with either an internal or external converter.

Note: For temporary bench testing purposes only, you may connect the RS–422 inter-

face signal wires according to Table 4-5. For permanent installations, follow the RS–

422 connection instructions on page 4-27.

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Colored-Wire

Pair Cable for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface.

Table 4-8 shows the RS–422 signals and their interface wire connectivity for bench

testing purposes only.

Table 4-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Bench Testing

Signal from Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect Wire

to Host DB9

Connect Wire

to Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

Signal ground Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 5 Pin 7

TxD - Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader sense

output, host sense input

Red Pin 2 Pin 3

Signal ground Red/Black Black Pin 5 Pin 7

RxD - Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader sense

input, host sense output

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-12

To connect the colored-wire cable for bench testing a reader with RS–

422 interface

1. Connect the yellow wire (signal ground) from the yellow and red wire pair to the

host DB9 Pin 5 or Host DB25 Pin 7.

2. Connect the red wire (transmit) from the yellow and red wire pair to the host

DB9 Pin 2 or Host DB25 Pin 3.

3. Connect the black wire (signal ground) from the red and black wire pair to the

host DB9 Pin 5 or Host DB25 Pin 7.

4. Connect the red wire (receive) from the red and black wire pair to the host DB9

Pin 3 or Host DB25 Pin 2.

Bench Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader Before Installation

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader factory default tag read protocol is

IATA tag read mode. Initially the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader reads only

Intellitag-based eGo tags and ignores ATA tags. For more information, see “47N

Select Tag Mode**” on page 7-15.

Note: Test tags should be eGo Windshield Sticker Tags affixed to a piece of nonmetal-

lic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thickness. The

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag has a reduced read range when not attached to glass.

To test that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader has power and

can read a tag presented in the read zone

1. Confirm that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader colored-wire pair

cable is correctly connected to a suitable AC or DC low-voltage power supply as

discussed on page 4-6 and page 4-7 and that the transformer is connected to a

power outlet.

If you are using an external antenna, confirm that the antenna is connected to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect

the antenna before applying power to the reader.

2. Confirm that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader colored-wire pair

cable communications are connected correctly as described in the section

“Connecting Communications for Bench Testing” on page 4-8.

3. Connect the two leads from the audible circuit tester to the white and red wire

pair (pair #8, lock/lock return) from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

power/communications cable.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-13

4. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting

Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press

ENTER.

5. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the

communications interface is attached and set the properties as:

• Bits per second: 9600 baud

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: none

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow control: none

6. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and ensure that

the sign-on message displays.

7. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-6. Commands

include those to switch to command mode, set operational mode, turn on RF, and

return the reader to data mode.

8. Pass an eGo Windshield Sticker Tag in front of the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader or antenna. The audible circuit tester should sound a tone

when the tag is read. If no tone sounds, ensure that steps 1,through 5 were

performed correctly and that you are using a compatible tag. Repeat steps 6 and

7. If no tone sounds, contact TransCore (see “Technical Support” on page 9-7).

9. Disconnect the circuit tester from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

power/communications cable.

10. Disconnect the power and communications connections made for pre-installation

testing.

Note: You will need the audible circuit tester again to determine the read zone when

installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader at the site.

Table 4-6 Commands for Bench Testing

Entry Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader to command

mode.

#470 #Done <CR/LF> Sets operational mode to

Dual (1) - Read eATA

data from Intellitag-based

tags and read ATA tags

#6401 #Done <CR/LF> Turns on RF channel.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader to data mode.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-14

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

on Round Pole or Flat Surface

This section lists procedures and materials required for mounting the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader on a round pole or on a ceiling, wall, or other flat surface

based on the site’s requirements.

In permanent installations using an antenna, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader should be positioned as close as possible to the antenna. Long cable runs

increase system sensitivity to noise. See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for maximum RF

cable lengths.

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader on a Round Pole

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can be simply and inexpensively

mounted on a round pole. The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diameter

and should extend approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The pole

must be installed according to local building codes.

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to mount the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader on a round pole:

•A 5/32-inch Allen wrench to assemble and adjust the mounting brackets

•Two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) wide, stainless steel hose clamp straps that are 12 inches

(30.5 cm) long for a typical 2-inch (5-cm) diameter pole or 24 inches (61 cm) long

for a 10-inch (25-cm) diameter pole

•Flat-tip screwdriver or adjustable wrench to tighten hose clamp straps

Procedures

To mount the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a pole

1. Unpack the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. A factory-mounted bracket

(Figures 4-2 and 4-3) is attached to the back of the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader. A pole mount bracket assembly (Figure 4-6) is bubble-

wrapped separately and contains a plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.

2. Using the two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) stainless steel hose clamps, attach the pole mount

bracket assembly to the pole approximately 8 feet (2.4m) above the pavement

surface. Tighten slightly so you can adjust the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader left or right, but not so slightly the straps slide down the pole.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-15

Figure 4-4 Back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Figure 4-5 Factory-Mounted Bracket

Figure 4-6 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly

Factory-mounted bracket

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-16

3. Using the four Allen screws and washers, attach the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader to the pole mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-7. Tighten

the screws slightly so that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can be

adjusted up or down, but not so slightly the mounting assembly slips.

Figure 4-7 The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Attached to the Pole

Mount Bracket

4. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to

the middle of the area where tags will be read, and tighten all screws and straps

slightly.

Note: Adjust the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to provide the most

direct line of sight to the tags.

Figure 4-8 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader with the approximate measurements for sites where tags would be

mounted on the interior driver-side windshield. eGo Windshield Sticker Tags may be

mounted on the interior upper center or upper corner of the windshield.

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-32.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-17

Figure 4-8 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Position

Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-8 are for demonstration purposes only and are

approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as

lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the Encompass 4/4800 Mul-

tiprotocol Reader matching site and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct

line of sight to the tags.

Caution

Connect the reader bracket to earth ground using a ground cable and stake.

TransCore recommends that you follow the National Electric Code for lightning

protection for the locale where you are installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-18

Mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader to a Wall or Flat Surface

The basic Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is supplied with a pole-mount

bracket assembly (Figure 4-6) that allows you to adjust the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader up and down. TransCore recommends using the wall-mount bracket

accessory kit (Figure 4-9) in addition to the pole-mount bracket to provide additional

horizontal aiming flexibility when attaching the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader to a pole with flat sides or to a wall or ceiling where other structures can inter-

fere with accurately aiming the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader toward the

tags.

Figure 4-9 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001)

Required Materials

You need the following materials to install the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader on a wall or flat surface. Ensure the use of high-quality, corrosion-resistant

anchor hardware.

•Anchor hardware suitable for the surface on which you mount the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Because the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader weighs only 9 1/2 lbs (4.3

kg), 0.25 in (0.6 cm) bolt hardware is adequate to secure the unit to a wall or

ceiling.

•Four hex nuts 3/8-16 threaded and four lockwashers

•5/32-inch Allen wrench

•One Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol wall mount bracket accessory kit (required)

Procedures

To mount the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a wall or ceiling

1. Unpack the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Set aside the pole mount

bracket.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-19

Use the bracket in the remaining steps to provide greater adjustment for the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. The pole-mount bracket is wrapped

separately from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and contains a

plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.

2. Using the 5/32-inch Allen wrench, remove the factory-mounted bracket attached

to the back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Remove all four

Allen screws and lock washers from the bracket and set aside.

3. Unpack the wall-mount bracket accessory kit.

4. Using the Allen screws and lock washers set aside in Step 2, attach the wall-

mount bracket to the back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, as

shown in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

5. Tighten the screws to secure the bracket.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-20

6. Using the four screws and washers supplied with the wall-mount bracket, attach

the factory-mounted bracket to the wall mount bracket, lining up the four outside

screw holes as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket

7. Tighten lightly, since you will want to adjust the bracket later. This subassembly

allows you to aim the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader left or right when

all three brackets are assembled.

8. Mount the pole-mount bracket to the wall, ceiling, or fixture using appropriate

anchors as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-21

9. Mount the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to the pole-mount bracket

using Allen screws, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Assembly to Pole

Mount Bracket

10. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to

the middle of the area where tags will be read and tighten all screws and straps

slightly.

Note: Adjust the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to provide the most direct

line of sight to the tags.

Caution

Connect the reader bracket to earth ground using a ground cable and stake.

TransCore recommends that you follow the National Electric Code for lightning

protection for the locale where you are installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader.

After mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect it to a

dedicated 16 to 20V AC or 16 to 28V DC power supply.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect

the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-22

Mounting the Antenna

If you are using the Encompass4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader that requires an external

antenna in permanent installations, the antenna should be positioned as close as possi-

ble to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Long cable runs increase system

sensitivity to noise. See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for maximum RF cable lengths.

This section provides guidelines for mounting antennas.

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side

Some site designs, for example those with curb-side antennas, require that the antenna

be mounted on a round pole. The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diam-

eter and should extend approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The

pole must be installed according to local building codes.

Procedures

Use the following guidelines to mount an antenna on a curb-side round pole.

To mount the antenna to a curb-side pole

1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the pole

approximately 8 feet (2.4m) above the pavement surface.

2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna left or right but not so slightly

that the antenna slides down the pole.

3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags

will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.

Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

Figure 4-14 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted antenna with the approx-

imate measurements for sites where tags would be mounted on the interior driver-side

windshield. eGo Windshield Sticker Tags may be mounted on the interior upper center

or upper driver-side corner of the windshield.

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-32.

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader. Follow the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the

Antenna” on page 4-6.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect

the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-23

Figure 4-14 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position

Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-14 are for demonstration purposes only and are

approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as

lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the antenna to match site

and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

Mounting the Antenna Overhead

Some site designs require that the antenna be mounted in an overhead location.

Procedures

To mount the antenna in an overhead location

1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the

overhead location at approximately 18 feet above the pavement surface.

2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna up and down but not so

slightly that there is a risk of the antenna falling.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-24

3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags

will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.

Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

For example, in toll lanes the Universal Toll Antenna (UTA) would be installed

approximately 15 degrees from the verticle.

Figure 4-15 illustrates an overhead-mounted antenna with approximate measurements

for the read zone.

Figure 4-15 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Installation with Overhead

Antenna

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-32.

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader. Follow the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the

Antenna” on page 4-6.

Connecting the Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a low-voltage AC power

supply follow the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the AC

Power Supply” on page 4-6.

To connect the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to a low-voltage DC power

supply follow the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the DC

Power Supply” on page 4-7.

After mounting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and antenna, if required,

you must connect the reader to a dedicated 16 to 20V AC or 16 to 28V DC power sup-

ply.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-25

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you must connect

the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Connecting Communications

TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and

Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials

required for connecting the communications to the junction box and to the sense input

and sense output circuits.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:

•PC or laptop

•Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™

running on a PC

•Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader to the PC

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader communications and customer interface sig-

nals are supplied from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to the host

through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair pigtail. The connector for this cable is

located on the back of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Refer to the fol-

lowing sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from the cable to

the terminal strip that is located inside the junction box.

These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232, RS–422, and Wiegand

communications between the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the PC.

Each section contains wiring instructions and pin assignments followed by step-by-

step connection procedures.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can remain powered up while connect-

ing reader-to-host PC communications.

RS–232 Interface

RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal

to the host male DB9 and DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-3.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-26

Connecting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Colored-Wire

Pair Cable

Table 4-7 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2

of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of

the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.

Table 4-7 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4/

4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

output, host sense

input

Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

input, host sense

output

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

output, host sense

input

Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol

Reader sense

input, host sense

output

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-27

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and

black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.

4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.

If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:

1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the

DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9

connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

RS–422 Interface

RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4/4800 Mul-

tiprotocol Reader communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface

with either an internal or external converter.

Table 4-8 shows the RS–422 signals and their interface wires.

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–422 interface

1. Connect the yellow wire (transmit +) from the yellow and red wire pair to the

host receive (+) signal.

2. Connect the red wire (transmit –) from the yellow and red wire pair to the host

receive (–) signal.

3. Connect the black wire (receive +) from the red and black wire pair to the host

transmit (+) signal.

4. Connect the red wire (receive –) from the red and black wire pair to the host

transmit (–) signal.

Table 4-8 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow/Red Yellow Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Red/Black Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Signal Ground

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-28

Wiegand Interface

Wiegand interface signals are supplied by three wires from the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader communications cable. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader with RS–232 or RS–422 comes with the Wiegand option built in. The Wie-

gand interface can only be used by the reader to output valid Wiegand tag reads. All

reader commands and responses are issued through the serial interface.

Table 4-9 shows the Wiegand signals and the interface wires.

To connect Wiegand interface

1. Connect the blue wire (data0) from the blue and red wire pair to the data0 wire of

the Wiegand device.

2. Connect the red wire (data1) from the blue and red wire pair to the data1 wire of

the Wiegand device.

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire from the yellow and black pair to the

Wiegand device’s signal ground.

Note: The RS–232 or RS–422 interface is still included on the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader even when you use the Wiegand configuration. If

serial communication is not needed, TransCore recommends leaving the DB9 or

DB25 connected to the cable for future use.

Warning

Do not cut the RS–232 red/black wires. If you cut the wires, you may not be able to

use them in the future for testing, setting frequency, or adding additional functions.

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader has two sense input circuits and three

sense output circuits available. The sense input circuits can be used to notify the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader of external events and are designed to be

Table 4-9 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

Wiegand Zero Output Blue/Red Blue Data0

Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or black Ground

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-29

connected to a free-of-voltage dry contact. Sense output circuits are single-pole, dou-

ble-throw relays that provide normally closed and normally open dry contacts. The

relay contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak (30 Vrms) or 60V DC at 1 A maximum. If

controlling an external gate or device requiring high current, an isolation transformer

is required.

The following sections provide information to connect the sense input and sense out-

put circuits.

Sense Input Circuits

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports two sense inputs – sense

input0 and sense input1– which requires two sense input lines for each loop sense or a

total of four sense input connections. Sense input0 is the presence detection device

line and is used to control RF power. As shown in Figure 4-16, sense input0 is through

the red/green wire pair on the I/O pigtail. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader expects the sense input0 circuit to close when a vehicle is present (i.e., a nor-

mally open condition). The minimum presence true period is fixed at 0 ms, which

indicates that no delay occurs in closing the circuit when a vehicle is present.

Sense input1 allows the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to monitor the status

of a peripheral device. The host computer can then check the status by polling the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Figure 4-16 Sample Circuit Connections

Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports three sets of sense output sig-

nals. Two sets– sense output0 and sense output1 – provide normally open or normally

closed sense outputs. The third sense output set is dedicated for testing and set up of

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-30

the reader. It is defined as the TAG_LOCK signal, which indicates a valid tag is in the

read field.

These sense outputs are dry contacts that provide normally open and normally closed

sense outputs. The relay contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak (30 Vrms) or 60V DC at

1 A maximum. If controlling an external gate or device requiring high current, an iso-

lation transformer is required.

As illustrated in Figure 4-16, sense output0, normally closed, is located on the orange/

black pair. Sense output0, normally open, is located on the brown/black pair.

In Wiegand mode operation, the sense outputs are not controlled by a predefined out-

put mode.

Table 4-10 lists the cable descriptions and functions for the interface signals. These

wire pairs can be used or terminated based on the specific project applications and site

requirements.

Using Table 4-10 as a guide to the functions of each of the wire signals, connect the

remaining wires to the appropriate terminal blocks on the terminal strip in the junction

box.

Table 4-10 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/Red E Blue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control

applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control

applications

White/

Red L White Lock Tag lock output,

active-closed Testing

maintenance

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/

Red N Green Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop) Loop and

presence

detection

P Red Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and

presence

detection

Blue/

Black R Blue Sense Input1 Sense Input1 General-purpose

sense input, not

used for detecting

presence

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-31

Caution

After connecting the wires in the communications cable, ground all drain wires

from the communications cable to the chassis ground in the NEMA enclosure.

S Black Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used for detecting

presence

Brown/

Black T Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched output to

control gate

U Brown Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0

normally open

terminal

Switched output to

control gate

Orange/

Black V Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

WOrangeSense

Output0_NC Sense Output0

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Green/

Black X Black Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

Y Green Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

White/

Black Z Black Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

a White Sense

Output1_NC Sense Output1

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black b Yellow GND Logic ground Signal ground

used with RS–232

and Wiegand

c Black GND Logic ground Signal ground

used with RS–232

and Wiegand

Table 4-10 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments (continued)

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-32

Marking the Read Zone

The area where the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol reads tags at the current RF

range is called the read zone. The antenna pattern, or read zone, of the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader would look roughly like a pear-shaped balloon if you were

able to see it. When installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you

should first mark the unit’s read zone using the RF range set at the factory-default

maximum. You can later adjust the read zone using the techniques discussed in “Fine-

Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-20.

If two Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers are installed near each other,

TransCore recommends that you fine-tune each reader for the ideal read zone before

connecting it permanently to sense input/sense output and communications cables. A

minimum of 2 MHz frequency separation between the two adjacent readers is required

for correct operation.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to mark the read zone:

•Test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

•Piece of windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thick-

ness and approximately 12 inches (30.48 cm) square on which to attach the eGo

Windshield Sticker Tag

Caution

The eGo Windshield Sticker Tag has a reduced read range when not attached to

glass.

•Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power as described in

the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Before

Installation” on page 4-12.

•Piece of chalk or roll of tape

•Plastic or wooden yardstick for ATA tags

•Vinyl electrical tape or hook-and-loop material

Procedures

Note: Using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read

pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.

Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

Installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

4-33

To mark the read zone

1. Confirm the following:

• You have correctly connected the power supply as described “Connecting

the AC Power Supply” on page 4-6 and “Connecting the DC Power Supply”

on page 4-7.

• You have correctly connected communications as described in “Connecting

Communications” on page 4-25.

• You have correctly connected sense input and sense output circuits as

described in “Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits” on page 4-

28.

2. Connect the red and white leads from the audible tester to the red and white pair

of wires from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader power/

communications cable.

3. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting

Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press

ENTER.

4. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the

communications interface is attached and set the properties as:

• Bits per second: 9600 baud

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: none

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow control: none

5. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and ensure that

the sign-on message displays.

6. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-6 on page 4-13.

Commands include those to switch to command mode, set operational mode, turn

on RF, and return the reader to data mode.

7. Secure the ATA test tag to the end of the yardstick using electrical tape or hook-

and-loop material or affix the test eGo Windshield Sticker Tag to the glass. Be

sure the tag polarization (horizontal or vertical alignment) matches that of the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or antenna used. If using an eGo test

tag, the glass should be in front of the tag (between the tag and the reader or

antenna).

8. Stand directly in front of and about 5 feet (1.5 m) away (see Figure 4-17) from

the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or antenna. Hold the stick or the

piece of glass so that the tag is positioned at a height and angle consistent with a

tag installed on a vehicle. The test tag should cause the audible tester to sound.

Note: If you hold the test tag in your hand, your hand absorbs the RF signal and

the test results are not accurate.

9. Mark the spot with chalk or tape.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotcol Reader System Guide

4-34

10. Move to the left until the sound stops and mark the ground with chalk or tape at

the location of the tag when the sound stopped.

11. Return to the center and then move to the right until the sound stops and mark the

ground with chalk or tape at the location of the tag when the sound stopped.

12. Return to the center and step backward 2 feet (0.6m) and repeat steps 5 through 7.

13. Continue moving the tag in this manner, placing marks on the ground to identify

the boundary of the read zone each time the sound stops. Continue moving the

tag to various locations until the read zone is fully marked.

14. You can now connect the outer marks to draw the outer boundary of the read

zone.

Figure 4-17 is a view of a sample read zone within a controlled lane. The outer X

marks show the outside edges of the read zone.

Figure 4-17 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern

15. Standing at the farthest point of the pattern, walk toward the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader or antenna and listen for a continuous sound from the

audible tester. If the sound is not continuous, it could indicate a weak or “patchy”

RF pattern. See “Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-20 to

adjust the read zone.

General Software Information

5-3

Chapter 5

General Software Information

This chapter provides software-related information for the Encompass™

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System.

This chapter presents various software-related topics arranged in alphabetical order by

subject. In addition to this chapter, see Chapter 6, “Communications Protocols,” and

Chapter 7, “Commands,” for more information.

Command Entry Conventions

All Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader commands are preceded by the start-of-

message character (#). The end-of-message sequence expected from the host is a car-

riage return (CR). The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader terminates messages

with a return and a line-feed (CR/LF). For example, the command #01 Switch To

Command Mode is typed as follows:

#01<ENTER>

where <ENTER> is the Enter or Return key.

Some command characters may be represented by the letter N. This letter indicates

you are to supply a value. Maximum valid entries are the numbers 0 through 9 and the

uppercase letters A through F. These letters allow for as many as 16 available user

responses and are based on the hexadecimal numbering system.

Commands have at least two characters following the # character. Table 5-1 shows the

basic structure of a four-character command.

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure

#1005 Set Baud Rate To 9600 Baud

# All commands are preceded by the # character.

1 Indicates the command group. This command is in Group 1-

Communications Port Control.

0 Indicates the command subgroup. In this example, all commands with

a second digit of 0 apply to the main port.

0 The command digit. In this example, the 0 indicates that this command

affects the baud rate.

5 Indicates the setting. Normally this is a variable and is usually a

hexadecimal value from 0 through F. In this example, 5 sets the baud

rate to 9600, the factory setting. In some commands, this digit may be

a four-place hexadecimal string or a character string.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

5-4

Command Response Conventions

Like the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader commands, responses are preceded

by the # character. Many Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader commands respond

with #Done or #Error indicating the command was or was not recognized and

completed. Other commands respond with a four-character identifier followed by one

or more values.

Table 5-2 shows an example of a command/reply sequence. This example assumes

that an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader with serial number SN97001P run-

ning version X.XX software is connected to a PC running a terminal emulation soft-

ware package such as Windows Hyper Terminal or Procomm Plus. The command

sequence verifies that communications are working correctly.

In command discussions, Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader response charac-

ters may be shown in brackets < >. The use of brackets indicates that the response is a

value in the range of characters. The brackets are not part of the response. For exam-

ple, the response to command #520 Display Power Fail Bit is either a 0 or a 1. In the

command discussion, the response is shown as:

#PWRB <0-1>

with actual Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader response being one of the fol-

lowing:

#PWRB 0

#PWRB 1

In this example, PWRB is the four-character identifier for power fail bit, and the 0 or 1

is the value. All spaces shown in the response are actual spaces sent from the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. In this example, one space is between the letter B

and the number.

Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence

Entry Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader

to command mode.

#505

<CR> #Model eGo2000 Series Ver

X.0X SN97001P <CR/LF> Reports the software

version and serial number.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader to data

mode.

General Software Information

5-5

Operating Parameters

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers maintain their operating parameters in

non-volatile memory (NVRAM) so that the parameters are preserved after a power-

down sequence.

Power Fail

The system maintains a power fail flag. The host transmits command #520 Display

Power Fail Bit to determine if a power down has occurred. This flag is cleared by both

command #63 Reset Reader and command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit.

Program Download

Program download stores the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol applications software

into the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader’s flash memory. Program download

is used to install program upgrades, add features, and to recover from corrupted pro-

gram data. The download mode supports a limited set of commands: #90 Load Pro-

gram Block, #91 Verify Flash Checksum, #96 Erase Flash Memory, #97 Perform

Destructive Memory Test, and #99 Exit Download Mode.

Download Considerations

You should consider the following factors when performing program download:

•The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader does not process tags while in

download mode.

•The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader accepts only download commands

while in download mode. It responds to all other commands with an error mes-

sage.

•The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader does not accept any program data

unless a successful erase of flash memory has been performed before transmitting

the data. Erasing the flash memory typically takes seven seconds.

•Exiting from download mode re-executes startup. If the new software has been

loaded without errors, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader comes up in

data mode. If a flash checksum error is detected, the Encompass 4/4800 Multipro-

tocol Reader reenters download mode and transmits a sign-on message with a

boot version of 0.00x and without a serial number.

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader uses default communications

parameters when operating in download mode – 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no

parity, basic protocol – and does not echo commands.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

5-6

Download Procedures

If TransCore releases a new version of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

software or if the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader seems not to be working

properly, you may need to download the software to the Encompass 4/4800 Multipro-

tocol Reader. Contact technical support or your TransCore Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader sales representative.

Startup

Upon startup, Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader’s transmit a sign-on message

or a boot ROM failure message.

Sign-On Message

If startup is successful, the sign-on message appears as follows:

Model [software version] SNYYYYYY

[Copyright notice]

where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader unit being used.

Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this number

appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored into reader

memory. The serial number must be assigned by factory-authorized personnel using

command #695 Set Serial Number. Because only six digits are allowed in the

software, when setting the serial number skip the fourth (middle) digit of the seven-

digit number shown on the reader label.

If the flash memory checksum does not indicate verification, the sign-on message

appears as follows:

Model [PARC] Ver 0.00x

[Copyright notice]

Boot Failure Message

The software performs a checksum function on itself. The function returns a specific

value for the particular version of software. If the value returned is not correct, the

boot ROM checksum assumes that locations have been corrupted and a failure condi-

tion exists. If the boot ROM checksum is not correct, a boot failure message is trans-

mitted. If the failure message does not transmit, a communications error has occurred

or the boot failed to the extent that it cannot transmit the failure message.

General Software Information

5-7

If the failure message version number equals 0.00 and no serial number exists, the

flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

is operating out of boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader automatically enters download mode and waits for a new program to be loaded

into the flash memory. Follow the instructions in “Program Download” on page 5-5 to

download a new program.

Tag/Message Buffer

In basic communication protocol, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader does

not provide tag memory storage beyond the quantity required for uniqueness check-

ing. This feature allows adequate buffering of tag data under normal operating condi-

tions. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader cannot operate as a stand-alone

component. When the buffer fills, subsequent tag IDs will be lost.

In error correcting protocol (ECP), a buffer of up to three additional tag reads will be

held in case a host system is unable to acknowledge tag reads in real time.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

5-8

Communications Protocols

6-3

Chapter 6

Communications Protocols

This chapter describes the communications protocols for the

EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Introduction

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports the following communica-

tions protocols:

•Basic

•Error correcting protocol (ECP)

The following protocol information provides reference information relevant to devel-

oping host software.

Communications are performed using the 7-bit ASCII code with optional parity, thus

providing easy setup, testing, and diagnostics with standard ASCII terminals and

serial printers. Parity must be enabled to achieve the specified undetected error rate.

Each message is framed within the start-of-message (som) and end-of-message (eom)

characters so that the host computer can detect the beginning and end of each mes-

sage. This convention is most important under marginal communications conditions

during which the host may receive extraneous noise-induced characters between

reader transmissions. In such instances, the host is capable of ignoring any messages

that do not conform to the som...eom frame sequence.

Both data mode and command mode require a two-way message interchange is when

using ECP. This interchange is completed by the message recipient returning a mes-

sage acknowledgement to the message sender.

With ECP, all transmissions require a message. If a message is not received, the sender

will time out with the same effect as if it had received a negative acknowledgment

(from the host) or an Error message from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader.

Software (XON/XOFF) flow control is optionally supported. Be careful in the use of

XON/XOFF since noise-induced characters may be interpreted by the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader as the XOFF character, which would suspend reader out-

put without information reaching the host computer. For more information see “Soft-

ware Flow Control” on page 8-19.

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

ECP.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-4

Basic Protocol

With basic protocol, messages sent to and from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader and the host are transmitted without error checking. For each host transmis-

sion, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader returns a Done or Error message

to the host.

When the host computer is physically close to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader and no sources of interference exist, the basic protocol provides reliable com-

munications.

The host must be ready to receive reader-transmitted messages because in basic proto-

col the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader does not wait for the host to

acknowledge a message before transmitting the next message. If necessary, the host

may halt reader transmissions by using software or hardware flow control. Refer to

Chapter 8 for flow control information.

Error Correcting Protocol

When the quality of data communications is imperative or may be suspect, you can

invoke ECP to ensure the integrity of data transmitted between the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader and the host.

Note: TransCore recommends that basic protocol (not ECP) be used when commands

are entered manually at the keyboard.

Wiegand output is automatically disabled when the reader is put into ECP mode.

Error correction is accomplished with the use of a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

value that is based on the message data. The originator (reader or host) calculates the

CRC value of a message and includes it in the transmitted message.

The recipient (reader or host) also calculates a CRC value for the received message. If

the transmitted message data is correct, the CRC value calculated by the recipient will

agree with the CRC value calculated by the originator. If the CRC values do not agree,

the recipient rejects the message.

Message sequence numbers are also included when using ECP. These sequence num-

bers are checked to determine if the message received has the correct sequence num-

ber; if not, the recipient rejects the message.

Since the seven-bit ASCII code is used and there are eight data bits per character, the

eighth bit can optionally be used to support parity. Where parity is selected, the CRC

value calculation includes the parity of each character in the calculation of the CRC

value.

Parity is required to achieve the most reliable communications. If parity is enabled,

both the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the host must issue a message

if any received character has a parity error. However, the message must not be trans-

Communications Protocols

6-5

mitted before receipt of the eom character. In this case, the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader will issue an Error message, and the host computer will issue a

negative acknowledgment message.

Basic Protocol and ECP Format

Note: In the following text, the symbols < and > are used to represent required vari-

able message data, and the symbols [and] are used to represent optional data. These

symbols are not part of the message syntax.

Reader Transmissions

The basic protocol format and the data inquiry protocol format are as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex) that represents an even number in

the range 0–9, A–F (0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, E). The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader maintains the number. The host must

acknowledge reader transmissions by sending an ACK message

with the same sequence number received from the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader. The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader updates its sequence number upon receipt

of a valid host ACK. If an ACK is not received, the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader retransmits the message. A reader

transmission sequence is not considered complete until the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives an ACK and

updates its sequence number.

<data> An ASCII string up to 72 characters long. This string may contain

tag data, a presence without tag report; an input status change

report; an Error06, Error07, Error08, or Error11

message; or a sign-on message. Auxiliary data may also be

included.

<crc> Field containing four ASCII digits that represent the 16-bit CRC

value calculated on the message. The CRC value is calculated on

bytes between the som character and the first <crc> byte.

When the host receives a properly framed message, it can

calculate a 16-bit CRC value. The calculation is applied to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-6

character string that immediately follows the <som> and that

ends with the character immediately preceding the first <crc>

character.

The transmitted CRC value can then be compared with the binary

equivalent of the received <crc> characters. If the transmitted

and received CRC values do not match, the recipient assumes the

message was received in error, and transmits a NAK message

response.

<eom> End-of-message characters (ASCII CR and LF). The system

includes both a carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF) to

facilitate the use of terminals and printers.

If the host receives a <som> character in the middle of a data

message, the message in progress is aborted. The assumption is

that an <eom> was lost and the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader is in the process of retransmitting the

previous message.

ECP Host ACK/NAK Response

With ECP, the host computer responds to all data message transmissions from the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using the following acknowledgment or

negative acknowledgment response format.

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> An echo of the sequence number received from the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader. The sequence number should

correspond to the data message that is being positively or

negatively acknowledged by the host. If the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader receives an ACK message with the

incorrect sequence number, the data message is retransmitted.

The host computer resets the anticipated data message sequence

number to that of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

before communications can resume without error.

<ack/nak> ASCII @ character for ACK response; ASCII ? character for NAK

response

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Communications Protocols

6-7

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader sets a user-programmable timeout

delay at the time each message is transmitted based on command #612NN Select

Error Correcting Protocol Timeout, where NN = timeout delay. To dis-

able the timeout delay for diagnostic purposes, issue the command #612FF Disable

Error Correcting Protocol Timeout.

If the timeout delay expires before the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

receives an ACK or NAK message from the host, a logical NAK condition will be

declared. If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives a NAK or timeout,

the reader retransmits the data message.

When the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives an ACK message, the

system software treats the message as having been properly received by the host. The

software increments the sequence number, and advances pointers to the next message

in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader’s message queue to prepare for send-

ing the next message.

Switch to Command Mode Request

The host computer may issue command #01 Switch to Command Mode while in

data mode.

The basic protocol format is as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number generated by the host computer separately

from that appearing in data messages transmitted by the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

<cmd> Switch to command mode (ASCII characters 01)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Host Transmission

The host computer initiates synchronous communications between the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the host. The host begins a sequence by issuing a

command; the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader responds accordingly.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-8

The basic protocol format is as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex digit) that represents an odd

number in the range 0–9, A–F (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, B, D, F). The host

should use odd sequence numbers in its command since the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader uses even sequence

numbers in its transmissions. This method eliminates the

possibility of a synchronous host command and an asynchronous

reader transmission having the same sequence number.

Upon receiving a host command, the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader echoes the command’s sequence number

in its response. Therefore, the host computer updates its sequence

number upon receipt of a valid reader message. If the sequence

number is not updated before transmission of the next command,

the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader will not service the

new command; it will retransmit its previous message. A

command/message sequence is not complete until the host

updates its sequence number.

<cmd> Command code, a string that contains from two to four ASCII

hex characters

[<data>] Optional data field, an ASCII string of as many as 20 characters

in length. For example, the store hardware configuration string

command is #696S...S or command #696 Store Hardware

Configuration String followed by the data string S...S.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Reader Command Response

The basic protocol format is

The ECP format is

Communications Protocols

6-9

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Echo of sequence number received in host command message

<resp> Response string. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

returns Done, Error, or another ASCII string depending on the

host transmission. This string can be up to 72 characters long.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR and LF)

Sample Messages

This section contains examples of typical messages transmitted between the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the host computer.

Reader Transmissions

Basic protocol reader transmission

#KING 1302<eom>

Host response

No host response for non-ECP

ECP reader transmission

#4KING 1302 <crc><eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

4Message sequence number

KING 1302 Message data: Tag ID is shown.

Other sample message data could be as follows:

IOST C0 O2 I0 D24 (display I/O status)

Error06 (frequency not set)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host response

#4@<crc><eom>

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-10

where

#Start-of-message character

4Message sequence number

@ ACK (acknowledgment character)

(? returned for a negative acknowledgment)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host Command Transmissions

Basic protocol host transmission

#64202<eom>

Reader response

#Done<eom> or #Error<eom>

#Error<eom> is returned if the host transmission is not a legal command with legal

data.

ECP host transmission

#764202<crc><eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

7Message sequence number

64202 Select RF Operating Frequency command where

642NN is the command and NN is a hexadecimal value from 00

to 34. In this example, 02 sets the RF frequency to 903 MHz.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Done Command has been invoked by the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

Reader response

#7Done<crc><eom> or #7Error<eom>

For some commands, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader responds with

data that relates to the command, such as T0F 0, to indicate Wiegand mode enabled

for a 532 Display Wiegand Mode Status command.

Communications Protocols

6-11

#7Error<eom> will be returned if host transmission is not a legal command with

legal data.

Timing and Synchronization

The ECP is largely independent of baud rate. The timeout delays previously described

are a function of baud rate.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports an ECP timeout, which

applies equally to both transmit and receive.

The receiver’s minimum timeout delay equals the time to transmit/receive the longest

anticipated message at the current baud rate setting. Additional margin should be

included for idle periods between characters; for example, processing overhead, if

any. The timeout delay period can be expressed as follows:

Τrec (ms) = L x [Τchar + Τidle]

where

Τchar (ms) 1000 x [ Bc / Rb ]

BcBits per character, typically 10

RbBaud rate, 2400–38.4 K

LLength of message in characters

Τidle Maximum idle period between characters (ms)

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports baud rates between

2400 and 38.4 K.

Likewise, the sender must set a timeout delay equal to the delay of nine characters at

the current baud rate setting. For example, the time required to shift out the <eom>

character plus the time to shift in the ACK or NAK message to be received plus a pro-

cessing allowance for the receiver to process the message and check for error condi-

tions.

Thus, the sending timeout delay can be expressed as follows:

Τsend (ms) = 9 * Τchar + Τerrchk

where

Τerrckh (ms) Processing period to perform error checking by receiver

The host computer can remotely set the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader’s

communications parameters while in the command mode, but TransCore does not rec-

ommend this action if communications conditions are marginal.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-12

After the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives new communications

parameters, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader issues the Done message

and switches to the new configuration immediately. The host computer switches its

communications parameters immediately after the transaction is complete.

As noted, the message initiator, such as the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

in data mode and the host computer in command mode, starts a timeout counter at the

time a message is transmitted. If the timeout expires before receiving an acknowledge-

ment message, a logical NAK condition is declared, and the initiator assumes the mes-

sage was received in error. In this instance, the message is retransmitted until an

acknowledgement message is received.

The message recipient, such as the host computer in data mode and the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader in command mode, starts a timeout counter when a

<som> character is received. If the timeout expires without the receipt of an <eom>,

the message acquisition is aborted (reset), and the receiver waits for the next <som>

character.

If the message recipient receives a second <som> character before an <eom> charac-

ter, the message acquisition is aborted (reset), and retransmission of the previous mes-

sage is assumed to be underway.

These strategies allow for recovery during periods when communications are marginal

or completely lost.

Note: It is important that the host computer limit the period during which the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader remains in command mode to avoid losing tag IDs.

RF is off in command mode and no tags can be read.

Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader addresses the following failure condi-

tions.

Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F)

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader detects an illegal sequence number in

a host command message, it discards the received message and sends no response. If it

receives an illegal sequence number in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had

been received and retransmits the data.

Wrong Sequence Number

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives the wrong sequence number

in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been received, and it retransmits the

data.

Incorrect CRC

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader detects an incorrect CRC value in a

host command message, it discards the received message. No response is sent. If it

receives an incorrect CRC value in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been

received, and it retransmits the data.

Communications Protocols

6-13

Illegal Command

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives an illegal command, it

returns its standard Error message.

Transmission Timeout

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader transmits an asynchronous message

and the host does not send an ACK before the ECP timeout occurs, the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader retransmits the message.

Receive Timeout

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives a <som> but does not receive

a matching <eom> before the ECP timeout occurs, it discards the incomplete message

and resets its receiver.

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader transmits asynchronous data at the

same time that the host sends a command, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader gives priority to receiving the command. It processes the command and sends

a message before it retransmits the asynchronous data.

Host-Addressed Failure Conditions

The host computer addresses the following failure conditions.

Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number

If the host detects an illegal or wrong sequence number in a reader response, it retrans-

mits the command with the same sequence number. If the host detects an illegal

sequence number in an asynchronous reader transmission, it sends a NAK message.

Incorrect CRC

If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in a reader message, it retransmits the com-

mand with the same sequence number. If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in an

asynchronous reader transmission, it transmits a NAK message.

Transmission Timeout

If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader does not respond to a host command

within a specified interval, the host software retransmits the command with the same

sequence number.

Receive Timeout

If the host receives a <som> but does not receive a matching <eom> within a specified

timeout interval, it discards the incomplete message and resets its receiver.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-14

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the host receives an asynchronous reader transmission at the same time it transmits

a command, it ignores the asynchronous message and waits for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader’s response. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

retransmits asynchronous data after it transmits the command message.

ECP Reliability

An undetected error is defined as a message having incorrect data or status but no par-

ity or CRC errors. An error transaction is defined as a message having either a parity

or CRC error. Laboratory testing indicates an undetected error rate of less than one

undetected error per 1,000,000 error transactions with parity enabled.

To ensure this error rate is not exceeded, the host must enable parity and adhere

closely to the timing specifications discussed previously in this chapter in the “Timing

and Synchronization” section.

CRC Calculation

The CRC used by the ECP is based on a 16-bit algorithm. The algorithm, as imple-

mented, operates on eight-bit characters, for example, seven-bit ASCII character plus

one optional parity bit. The 16-bit result is converted to four ASCII hex characters and

is appended to messages transmitted by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader accepts four ASCII < ` > characters (60

hex) as a wild card CRC value in lieu of a valid four-character CRC value to facilitate

testing and diagnostic checkout.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader implements the algorithm with a 512-

byte lookup table to reduce the processing overhead requirements.

To simplify the implementation of the CRC algorithm by host software developers,

several examples of the calculation are provided in C source code on the following

pages. The calculation may be performed with or without a lookup table, depending

on the trade-off between code memory and processing overhead.

Example 1 presents an example of a function (CALCCRC) that calculates the CRC

value through a call to a separate function (UPDCRC).

unsigned short calccrc(char *message)

{

unsigned short crc = 0;

for ( ; *message != (char)0;message++)

crc = updcrc(*message & 0xff, crc);

return (crc)

}

Communications Protocols

6-15

Example 3 contains an example of UPDCRC that does require a lookup table.

Example 2 shows an example of UPDCRC that does not require a lookup table.

#define BITS_PER_CHAR 8

unsigned short updcrc (unsigned short ch, unsigned short

crc)

{

while (--counter >= 0)

if (temp & 0x8000) {

temp <<= 1;

temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);

temp ^= 0x1021;

}

else {

temp <<= 1;

temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);

}

return(temp);

}

#define updcrc(cp, crc)( crctab[((crc >> 8) & 255)]^ (crc << 8) ^ cp

static unsigned short crctab [256] = {

0x0000, 0x1021, 0x2042, 0x3063, 0x4048, 0x50a5, 0x60c6, 0x70e7,

0x8108, 0x9129, 0xa14a, 0xb16b, 0xc18c, 0xd1ad, 0xe1ce, 0xf1ef,

0x1231, 0x0210, 0x3273, 0x2252, 0x52b5, 0x4294, 0x72f7, 0x62d6,

0x9339, 0x8318, 0xb37b, 0xa35a, 0xd3bd, 0xc39c, 0xf3ff, 0xe3de,

0x2462, 0x3443, 0x0420, 0x1401, 0x64e6, 0x74c7, 0x44a4, 0x5485,

0xa56a, 0xb54b, 0x8528, 0x9509, 0xe5ee, 0xf5cf, 0xc5ac, 0xd58d,

0x3653, 0x2672, 0x1611, 0x0630, 0x76d7, 0x66f6, 0x5695, 0x46b4,

0xb75b, 0xa77a, 0x9719, 0x8738, 0xf7df, 0xe7fe, 0xd79d, 0xc7bc,

0x48c4, 0x58e5, 0x6886, 0x78a7, 0x0840, 0x1861, 0x2802, 0x3823,

0xc9cc, 0xd9ed, 0xe98e, 0xf9af, 0x8948, 0x9969, 0xa90a, 0xb92b,

0x5af5, 0x4ad4, 0x7ab7, 0x6a96, 0x1a71, 0x0a50, 0x3a33, 0x2a12,

0xdbfd, 0xcbdc, 0xfbbf, 0xeb9e, 0x9b79, 0x8b58, 0xbb3b, 0xab1a,

0x6ca6, 0x7c87, 0x4ce4, 0x5cc5, 0x2c22, 0x3c03, 0x0c60, 0x1c41,

0xedae, 0xfd8f, 0xcdec, 0xddcd, 0xad2a, 0xbd0b, 0x8d68, 0x9d49,

0x7e97, 0x6eb6, 0x5ed5, 0x4ef4, 0x3e13, 0x2e32, 0x1e51, 0x0e70,

0xff9f, 0xefbe, 0xdfdd, 0xcffc, 0xbf1b, 0xaf3a, 0x9f59, 0x8f78,

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-16

Example 4 shows an example of a function that creates the lookup table.

#include <stdio.h>

#define MAX_CHAR 256

#define BITS_CHAR 8

#define SIGN_BIT 0x8000

#define POLY 0x1021

unsigned short crctab [MAX_CHAR];

main ()

{

unsigned short ch;

unsigned short workval;

unsigned short bit;

unsigned short carry;

for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++) {

workval = ch << BITS_CHAR;

for (bit = BITS_CHAR; bit != 0; bit--) {

carry = (workval & SIGN_BIT);

workval <<= 1;

if (carry)

workval ^= POLY;

}

crctab[ch] = workval;

0x9188, 0x81a9, 0xb1ca, 0xa1eb, 0xd10c, 0xc12d, 0xf14e, 0xe16f,

0x1080, 0x00a1, 0x30c2, 0x20e3, 0x5004, 0x4025, 0x7046, 0x6067,

0x83b9, 0x9398, 0xa3fb, 0xb3da, 0xc33d, 0xd31c, 0xe37f, 0xf35e,

0x02b1, 0x1290, 0x22f3, 0x32d2, 0x4235, 0x5214, 0x6277, 0x7256,

0xb5ea, 0xa5cb, 0x95a8, 0x8589, 0xf56e, 0xe54f, 0xd52c, 0xc50d,

0x34e2, 0x24c3, 0x14a0, 0x0481, 0x7466, 0x6447, 0x5424, 0x4405,

0xa7db, 0xb7fa, 0x8799, 0x97b8, 0xe75f, 0xf77e, 0xc71d, 0xd73c,

0x26d3, 0x36f2, 0x0691, 0x16b0, 0x6657, 0x7676, 0x4615, 0x5634,

0xd94c, 0xc96d, 0xf90e, 0xe92f, 0x99c8, 0x89e9, 0xb98a, 0xa9ab,

0x5844, 0x4865, 0x7806, 0x6827, 0x18c0, 0x08e1, 0x3882, 0x28a3,

0xcb7d, 0xdb5c, 0xeb3f, 0xfb1e, 0x8bf9, 0x9bd8, 0xabbb, 0xbb9a,

0x4a75, 0x5a54, 0x6a37, 0x7a16, 0x0af1, 0x1ad0, 0x2ab3, 0x3a92,

0xfd2e, 0xed0f, 0xdd6c, 0xcd4d, 0xbdaa, 0xad8b, 0x9de8, 0x8dc9,

0x7c26, 0x6c07, 0x5c64, 0x4c45, 0x3ca2, 0x2c83, 0x1ce0, 0x0cc1,

0xef1f, 0xff3e, 0xcf5d, 0xdf7c, 0xaf9b, 0xbfba, 0x8fd9, 0x9ff8,

0x6e17, 0x7e36, 0x4e55, 0x5e74, 0x2e93, 0x3eb2, 0x0ed1, 0x1ef0,

};

Communications Protocols

6-17

}

for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++)

printf("0x%04x\n", crctab[ch]);

}

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance

Under certain conditions, communications between the host and Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader may be lost temporarily and maintenance may be required. The

reader or host is sending out a message and waiting for an acknowledgment. When the

acknowledgment is not received, the message is sent again. Additional messages are

also buffered. Often the first indication that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader software is in an ECP “loop” is when the user/technician sees a recurring dis-

play of the same message repeated over and over again on the monitor. The procedure

described in the following paragraphs enables the maintenance technician to change

configuration or test tag reading manually.

Assuming that the ECP timeout is at the factory default of 12.7 seconds (or other value

that allows enough time for the commands to be manually entered) the following com-

mand sequence may be used to break out of an ECP loop. This command sequence

uses four ASCII < ` > characters (60 hex) as wild card CRC values.

Note: The ASCII <`> character (60 hex) is commonly located on the ~ key.

You must acknowledge existing messages by issuing commands with the generic for-

mat:

#x@‘‘‘‘<eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

xMessage sequence number. This must be the same as the

sequence number of the message being acknowledged

@ACK (acknowledgment character)

<‘‘‘‘> Wild card CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

The following is a typical sequence after power-on limiting buffered messages.

Note: Ensure that no tags are in the field when you are performing this troubleshoot-

ing procedure.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader that uses an exter-

nal antenna, ensure that you have connected the antenna or a dummy load to the

reader before applying power to the reader.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

6-18

Reader transmission on power-up:

#0 Model …. SN <crc><eom>

Manually enter: #0@````<eom>

Manually enter: #2@````<eom>

Manually enter: #101‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into command mode

Reader response: #1Done<crc><eom>

Manually enter: #3610‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into basic protocol,

disabling ECP

reader response: Done

Enter any other desired diagnostic or directive commands in basic protocol. After

maintenance is complete enter the command:

#00 to return the reader to data mode

#611 to return to error correcting protocol,

and then either cycle power or issue

#100````<eom> command to return

reader to data mode

Commands

7-3

Chapter 7

Commands

This chapter discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used to

control the EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader configuration and

operation.

Introduction

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is delivered from the factory with spec-

ified default settings that determine how the reader operates. Commands transmitted

by the host computer can change the default settings and control additional features.

The commands can be transmitted by manually entering the commands at the host

keyboard if the host is in terminal emulation mode. The Encompass 4/4800 Multipro-

tocol Reader can also communicate with ASCII terminals.

Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface and a

terminal emulation program to send commands to the reader. You can leave the Wie-

gand interface connected during this procedure.

Operating Modes

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader has three modes of operation: data

mode, command mode, and download mode. The software for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader contains two separate programs — boot and application. The

boot program has control of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader on startup

and when operating in download mode. The application program has control of the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader during data mode and command mode oper-

ation and holds the application code. Together, they control the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader in the three modes of operation.

Data Mode

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in the data mode upon power-up.

While in the data mode, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader sends all com-

munications as data messages, such as tag IDs and reports, to the host computer.

Reports provide information on input status changes (input0 and input1), a presence

without tag report, and buffer overflow information. The host computer can send only

two commands to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader while in data mode:

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-4

•Command #01 Switch To Command Mode changes the Encompass 4/4800 Mul-

tiprotocol Reader from the data mode to the command mode. See “01 Switch to

Command Mode” on page 7-6.

•Command #05 Switch To Download Mode allows the host computer to download

new software into the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. See “05 Switch to

Download Mode” on page 7-6.

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader transmits ID codes to the host

computer when the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in data mode. If the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader remains in the command mode with tags

passing through the read zone, all tag IDs are lost.

Command Mode

While the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in the command mode, the host

computer sends commands to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader that can be

used to control the operation and configuration of the reader. After the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader receives a command, it transmits a command response

message. Typically, the command message contains Error, Done, or data relating

specifically to the command request. These messages may be of variable length since

some commands require information as part of the message; for example, Display

Wiegand Mode Status.

Communications can be lost if the host computer attempts to send certain commands

under marginal communications conditions. For example, if the host computer trans-

mits the command request to change the baud rate and the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader properly receives the request and transmits the Done message, one of

the two following conditions may occur:

•If the host computer receives the Done message, then both the host and the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader switch to the new baud rate, and com-

munications are maintained.

Note: In many applications, the host must be set to the new baud rate as it will not

change automatically.

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader changes the baud rate immedi-

ately after issuing the Done message.

•However, if the host does not receive the Done message transmitted by the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, the host assumes that the command was

not properly sent and does not switch to the new baud rate, causing a loss of com-

munications.

Caution

The host computer should not attempt to change communications parameters or

protocols during marginal communications conditions; otherwise, a loss of commu-

nications can result.

Commands

7-5

Download Mode

In download mode, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader allows the host to

download new software and supports a limited set of commands.

While in download mode, the reader communications port parameters are fixed at the

following factory-default settings: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, soft-

ware flow control (XON/XOFF), basic protocol.

While in download mode, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader turns RF off,

does not process tags, and does not echo host commands. See “90 Load Program

Block” on page 7-46 through “99 Exit Download Mode” on page 7-47.

Command List

Reader commands are divided into groups based on primary function. The following

sections provide information about each command in command number order. Refer

to Appendix D for listings of commands in numerical and alphabetical order.

Some commands supported by TransCore’s AI1620 SmartPass readers are not

available or have been changed for the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Other commands, such as command #644NN Set RF Attenuation and #6402

Enable Diagnostic RF Continuous Wave, have been added for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader. Further, commands have been added that are supported only in

later versions of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Software. These com-

mands are indicated as follows:

•A single asterisk (*) indicates that the command has been altered so that it is dif-

ferent from the AI1620 SmartPass command.

•A double asterisk (**) indicates a new command or added value that is not present

in the AI1620 SmartPass command list.

•A triple asterisk (***) indicates an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader com-

mand that is supported only in later versions of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader Software. Commands so indicated have explanatory notes.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System does not include a real-time

clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing var-

ies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Unless stated otherwise, values listed for timing-related command variables assume

an ID operational mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignoring ATA tags) and an

eGo-compatible tag in the read field and these values may vary.

In the following text, the symbols < and > represent variable message data. These

symbols are not part of the message syntax.

Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data

strings and for hex digits A–F.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-6

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0

Group 0 commands control reader mode. The mode determines whether the reader is

transmitting data to or receiving data from a host computer or terminal.

00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default)

Command #00 switches the reader to data mode, which allows the reader to transmit

tag data (ID codes) to the host. The reader enters data mode on power up.

While operating in data mode, the reader accepts the following commands:

•Command #01 Switch to Command Mode

•Command #05 Switch to Download Mode

Reader response:

Done

01 Switch to Command Mode

Command #01 switches the reader to command mode, which allows the reader to

accept commands from a host or terminal. While in command mode, the reader turns

RF off and does not acquire tags.

Reader response:

Done

05 Switch to Download Mode

Command #05 switches the reader to download mode, which allows an external host

computer to download new software into the reader flash memory.

While operating in download mode, the reader accepts a limited set of commands:

#90 Load Program Block, #91 Verify Flash Checksum, #96 Erase Flash Memory,

#97 Perform Destructive Memory Test, and #99 Exit Download Mode.

To exit the download mode, the host must transmit command #99 Exit Download

Mode. The reader re-executes startup to ensure proper initialization of operating

parameters and to verify the boot ROM and flash memory checksum values. The

reader does not accept the command #05 Switch To Download Mode if it is operating

in data mode; it must first be switched to command mode (command #01).

Reader response:

Done or Error

Commands

7-7

Communications Port Control — Command

Group 1

Group 1 commands configure the parameters used by the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader to communicate with a host computer or terminal. These commands

set baud rate, stop bits, parity, and end-of-line delay.

100N Select Baud Rate*

Command #100N selects the reader baud rate. The factory-default setting is 9600

baud. The N variable specifies the baud rate shown in Table 7-1.

Caution

If ECP is enabled, ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for the new baud rate.

See “Timing and Synchronization” on page 6-11.

Reader response:

Done or Error

101N Select Stop Bits

Command #101N selects the number of stop bits for reader character transmission.

The factory default setting is 1 stop bit. The N variable specifies the number of stop

bits as indicated in Table 7-2.

Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands

Command Baud Rate Selected

1002*** (supported only in Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Software Version TBD) 1200***

1003 2400

1004 4800

1005 9600 (factory default)

1006 19.2 K

1007** 38.4 K**

Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands

Command Stop Bits Selected

1010 1 (factory default)

1011 2

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-8

Reader response:

Done

102N Select Parity

Command #102N selects the reader parity setting. The factory-default setting is par-

ity disabled. The N variable specifies parity as shown in Table 7-3.

Reader response:

Done

Command Group 2

Group 2 commands control the real-time clock which maintains the SmartPass

internal time and date. This time and date can be appended to IDs, error messages, and

sensor input reports. An internal battery supports the clock, so time and date are

preserved if main power is lost.

20 Set Time

Command 20 sets the time. Enter the time in the proper format: two-digit decimal

entries with no spaces between characters and using colons as

delimiters. The entry format is as follows:

20HH:MM:SS or 20HH:MM:SS:hh

where:

HH represents hours (00 to 23).

MM represents minutes (00 to 59).

SS represents seconds (00 to 59).

hh represents hundredths of a second (00 to 99).

:is the time delimiter.

If hundredths of a second are not specified, the reader sets the hundredths register to

00.

Reader message:

Done or Error

Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands

Command Data Bits Parity Selected

1020 8 Disable parity (factory default)

1021 7 Select even parity

1022 7 Select odd parity

Commands

7-9

21 Set Date

Command 21 sets the date. Enter the date in the proper format: two-digit decimal

entries with no spaces between characters and using forward slashes “/” as delimiters.

The entry format is as follows:

21MM/DD/YY

where:

MM represents the month (01 to 12).

DD represents the day (01 to 31).

YY represents the last two digits of the year (00 to 99).

/is the date delimiter.

Reader message:

Done or Error

22 Display Time and Date

Command 22 displays the reader’s current time and date. One space separates the time

and the date output.

Reader message:

HH:MM:SS.hh MM/DD/YY

where:

HH represents hours.

MM represents minutes.

SS represents seconds.

hh represents hundredths of seconds.

:is the time delimiter.

MM represents the month.

DD represents the day.

YY represents the last two digits of the year.

/is the date delimiter.

Append Information — Command Group 3

Group 3 commands append useful information to reader transmissions, such as IDs,

error messages, and sensor input reports. Auxiliary information such as reader num-

ber, antenna number (or manual entry code), number of times the previous tag was

read, and sensor input status can be appended to the ID using the Group 3 commands.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-10

30N Append Time and Date Selection

This command selects the option of appending the time and date to transmitted IDs,

error messages, presence without tag reports, and input status change reports. The

factory default setting is time and date appended (command 302).

The reader returns an Error message if its tag buffer contains data. The reset reader

command 63 may be transmitted to clear the buffer; however, tag ID data will be lost.

If this is unacceptable, allow the buffer to empty before re-issuing append time and

date command 30N. Append Time and Date commands are shown in Table 7-4

The reader transmits messages with time and date appended as follows. One space

separates the time from the date.

where:

string is a tag ID, error message, or report.

& separates <string> from the time and date.

HH:MM:SS is the time delimiter.

MM/DD/YY is the date delimiter.

Reader response:

Done or Error

31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection

The command #31N selects the option of appending auxiliary information to transmit-

ted IDs, presence-without-tag reports, and input status change reports. Auxiliary infor-

mation is not appended to error messages. The factory-default setting is no auxiliary

information appended. The N variable specifies whether or not auxiliary information

is to be appended. Append Auxiliary Information commands are shown in Table 7-5.

Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands

Command Append Option

300 No time and date appended

302 Time and date appended (factory default)

Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands

Command Append Option

310 No auxiliary information appended (factory default)

311 Auxiliary information appended

Commands

7-11

The reader transmits messages with auxiliary information appended as:

where

%Separates the auxiliary information and signals the host

computer that auxiliary information is appended.

xx Reader ID. Value can be set with command #60NN.

-Auxiliary information delimiter

yAntenna number. Value fixed at 0.

zz Number of reads (00 to FF hexadecimal) of the previous tag

qCurrent status of input0 and input1 (0 to 3). Refer to

“526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-20. These values are inverted

if input inversion is enabled with command 6941.

Reader response:

Done or Error

ID Filtering — Command Group 4

Group 4 commands set criteria for filtering (buffering or discarding) ID codes. These

commands are useful for eliminating duplicate ID codes and selecting the type of tags

read by the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

40 Transmit All ID Codes

Command #40 instructs the reader to transmit all IDs without regard for uniqueness.

This command can be useful when tuning the lane and mapping the footprint or per-

forming diagnostics.

After diagnostics are complete, you may want to reinstate the uniqueness check using

command #410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria.

Reader response:

Done or Error

410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)

Command #410N instructs the reader to buffer and transmit ID codes according to

the following test: an ID is read if previously decoded IDs have changed value at

least N+1 times since the new ID was last received. IDs that do not pass the test are not

read. The factory-default setting is command #4100, which selects a separation of

one ID. Variable N specifies ID separation as shown in Table 7-6.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-12

Each time the reader receives a tag ID, it compares the ID with the contents of a com-

parison register. This register contains the following two items:

Item 1 Most recently acquired ID

Item 2 Second-most recently acquired ID (if different from item 1)

When the uniqueness filter is set to a separation of one ID, the newly acquired ID is

transmitted only if it is different from item 1. When the uniqueness filter is set to a

separation of two IDs, the reader transmits the newly acquired ID only if it is different

from both items 1 and 2.

Note: A new ID can fail the filter test and not be transmitted; however, it remains

stored in the comparison register.

The uniqueness test has a two-minute time limit. If an ID is buffered, it will not be

accepted again unless it arrives at the reader more than two minutes from the previous

arrival or until the receipt of one or more other IDs reset the uniqueness.

Note: The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System does not include a real-

time clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal tim-

ing varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read

field.

Reader response:

Done

43 Buffer All ID Codes

Command 43 buffers all acquired ID codes. It effectively cancels any uniqueness

criteria previously set by select unique ID code criteria command 410N.

Note: Command 43 is for diagnostic purposes only.

After diagnostics are complete, reset the select unique ID code criteria using

command 410N.

Reader response:

Done

Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria

Command Uniqueness Criteria

4100 Separation of 1 ID (factory default)

4101 Separation of 2 IDs

Commands

7-13

450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default)

Command #450 is a default set in the factory to disable Wiegand mode.

Reader response:

Done

451 Enable Wiegand Mode

Command #451 enables Wiegand mode, which allows the reader to transmit data in a

format that emulates the output of a magnetic card reader.

In Wiegand mode, the reader transmits Wiegand-formatted tag data through the Wie-

gand interface and ASCII data (the reader accepts reader commands and responds)

through the serial port interface. The reader outputs data from Wiegand-programmed

tags via the Wiegand interface (the red/blue pair for data1/data0; yellow/black pair for

logic ground). Tags that are not Wiegand-formatted are not transmitted through the

Wiegand interface or the serial port when in Wiegand mode, although the tag lock

relay is activated on any tag acquired.

Reader response:

Done or Error

452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default)

Command 452 disables tag translation mode. Incoming full-frame tags will be directly

converted to ASCII. They will not be translated from Association of American

Railroads (AAR) and American Trucking Associations (ATA) format to ASCII.

Reader response:

Done

453 Enable Tag Translation Mode

Command 453 enables the translation of tags in AAR and ATA formats. Specific data

fields, such as owner ID and car number, will be extracted from these tags, translated

according to AAR or ATA standards, and converted to ASCII. Tags that are not

programmed in AAR or ATA format will be directly converted to ASCII. The reader

will not attempt to translate data from half-frame or dual-frame tags.

Reader response:

Done

454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default)

Command #454 is a default set in the factory to disable the multi-tag sort function.

Reader response:

Done

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-14

455 Enable Multi-tag Sort

Command #455 enables the multi-tag sort function that allows the reader to identify

unique tags within a group of Intellitag-based tags. Multi-tag sort allows full operation

of the tags and reader to be carried out with any number of tags in the presence of the

reader.

Reader response:

Done or Error

Note: Enabling the multi-tag sort function adversely affects the vehicle speed at

which tags may be read. If there is only one Intellitag-based tag in the vehicles of the

target population, multi-tag sort should be disabled.

456 Enable eGo Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort (Fac-

tory Default)

Command #456 enables the reader to send the eGo tag initialize command as part of

the multi-tag sort function. When the reader sends the eGo tag initialize command, all

tags in the RF field reenter the sort process.

Reader response:

Done or Error

457 Disable eGo Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort

Command #457 disables the reader from sending the eGo tag initialize command as

part of the multi-tag sort function. Any eGo tags already identified by the reader dur-

ing the sort process will not be re-identified as long as they remain powered in the RF

field. The reader will only identify new tags that come into the RF field or tags that do

not remain powered in the RF field.

Reader response:

Done

458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #458 is a default set in the factory to disable the second alternate group

select function.

Reader response:

Done

459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select

Command #459 enables the second alternate group select function that allows the

reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When second alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the

specified criteria will not be read.

Commands

7-15

Reader response:

Done or Error

46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #46NN sets the time delay to control the reader retransmission of Wiegand

data of a tag remaining in the read zone where NN is a hexadecimal code from 01 to

FF.

Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the

operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The factory default is 4601 (1

second). The timing in ATA tag read mode is approximately twice these values.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f.

Reader response:

Done or Error

47N Select Tag Mode**

Command #47N selects the eGo ATA (eATA) or ATA tag read mode for the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. The N variable specifies eATA/ATA tag read mode

as indicated in Table 7-7.

Caution

Dual tag read operation should only be used in applications where vehicles come to

a complete stop or are controlled to a very low speed.

Table 7-7 Tag Read Mode Commands

Command Operational Mode Tags Read

470 Dual (1) Read eATA data from Intellitag-based tags

and read ATA tags.

471 ATA Read ATA data from ATA tags.

472 ID Read 64-bit ID data from Intellitag-based

tags and ignore ATA tags.

473 IATA Read eATA data from Intellitag-based tags

and ignore ATA tags.

474 Dual (2) Read 64-bit ID data from Intellitag-based

tags and read ATA data from ATA tags.

477 ID - No EAC check Reads the 64-bit ID data from all Intellitag-

based tags regardless of the factory

programming of the embedded application

code (EAC) in tag memory bytes 10

through 17.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-16

Reader response:

Done or Error

490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #490 is a default set in the factory to disable the third alternate group select

function.

Reader response:

Done

491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select

Command #491 enables the third alternate group select function that allows the reader

to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When third alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-

ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done or Error

492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #492 is a default set in the factory to disable the fourth alternate group

select function.

Reader response:

Done

493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select

Command #493 enables the fourth alternate group select function that allows the

reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When fourth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the

specified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done or Error

494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #494 is a default set in the factory to disable the fifth alternate group select

function.

Reader response:

Done

Commands

7-17

495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select

Command #495 enables the fifth alternate group select function that allows the reader

to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When fifth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-

ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done or Error

495 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #496 disables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to

distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Reader response:

Done or Error

497 Enable Alternate Group Select

Command #497 enables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to

distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Reader response:

Done or Error

Reader Status — Command Group 5

Group 5 commands provide status reports on the parameters and operation of the

reader.

505 Display Software Version

Command #505 displays the reader model number, software version information, and

assigned serial number.

Reader response:

Model E4 TBD Series Ver X.XX SNYYYYYY

where

X.XX Version number

YYYYYY Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on

the reader product label

506 Display Hardware Configuration Information

Command #506 displays hardware configuration information stored in the reader

memory by the user. Hardware configuration information is empty by default until

you set the information to any 20 character ASCII string desired using command

#696S...S.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-18

Reader response:

An ASCII string from 1 to 20 characters in length

520 Display Power Fail Bit

Command #520 displays the value of the reader power fail bit. The power fail bit

changes from 0 to 1 when power to the reader is interrupted. To reset the bit, use com-

mand #63 Reset Reader or command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit. On initial power-up,

the host should transmit one of these two commands to clear the power fail bit.

Reader response:

PWRB P<0 to 1>R0

where

P0 No power failure detected

P1 Power failure detected

R0 Not applicable to Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

521 Display Reader ID Number

Command #521 displays the reader ID that is sent in the auxiliary data field.

Reader response:

RDID xx

where xx = 01 to FF (hexadecimal)

522 Display Communications Port Parameters

Command #522 displays the selected communications port parameters, including the

baud rate (#100N), the number of stop bits (#101N), the parity scheme (#102N), and

the end-of-line delay.

Reader response:

MAIN B<3 to 7> S<0 to 1> P<0 to 2> D0

where

B3 2400 baud

B4 4800 baud

B5 9600 baud (factory default)

B6 19.2 kbps

Commands

7-19

B7** 38.4 kbps

S0 one stop bit (factory default)

S1 two stop bits

P0 no parity (factory default)

P1 even parity

P2 odd parity

D0 00 ms end-of-line delay (fixed)

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory default settings are

assigned, the reader message is

MAIN B5 S0 P0 D0

indicating 9600 baud, one stop bit, no parity, and 0 ms end-of-line delay.

Note: The information transmitted in response to command #522 applies to data and

command mode operation only. While operating in download mode, default communi-

cations parameters are always used.

524 Display Appended Information Status*

Command #524 displays the information being appended to the reader transmissions.

Command #31N appends information. Append time and date are not available to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Reader response:

IDAP T<0> D<0> X<0 to 1>

where

T0 Time not appended

T1* Time appended (not valid for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader )

D0 Date not appended

D1* Date appended (not valid for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader )

X0 Auxiliary information not appended (factory default)

X1 Auxiliary information appended

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-20

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory-default settings are

assigned, the reader response is

IDAP T0 D0 X0

indicating time*, date*, and auxiliary information not appended.

Note: Auxiliary information may only be appended to ID codes, presence without tag

reports, and input change reports.

525 Display Communications Protocol Status*

Command #525 displays the status of command #61N Selected Communications

Protocol, command #614N Selected Mode of Flow Control, and command #612NN

ECP Timeout.

Reader response:

ECPS P<0 to 1> T<01 to FF> X<0 to 2> S0

where

P0 Basic protocol enabled (factory default)

P1 ECP enabled

Txx ECP timeout where xx = 01 to FE (hexadecimal)

Timeout (ms) = 50 * xx

If xx = FF timeout disabled

X0 Flow control disabled

X1 Software flow control enabled (factory default)

X2 Hardware flow control enabled

S0 start of message character is #

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is:

ECPS P0 TFE X1 S0

which means basic protocol enabled, an ECP timeout of 254 (12,700 ms, 12.7 sec),

software flow control enabled, and start of message character is #.

526 Display I/O Status

Command #526 displays the current input/output status. The reader message indi-

cates whether outputs are being controlled externally by the host through command

#620N Output Control or internally through command #621 Predefined Output

Mode. It also displays the current status of two outputs, two inputs, and the selected

output pulse duration that is set by command #67N.

Note: The value of the output pulse duration varies depending on the operative tag

read mode and the type of tag in the read field. All times are approximate.

Commands

7-21

Reader response:

IOST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 3> I<0 to 3> D<0 to F>

where

C0 Host controls outputs

C1 Predefined output mode

O0 Both outputs off

O1 Output0 on

O2 Output1 on

O3 Both outputs on

I0 Both inputs false

I1 Input0 true

I2 Input1 true

I3 Both inputs true

D0 to D8 48 ms (ID, IATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

130 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

D9 60 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

140 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

DA 76 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

190 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

DB 152 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

300 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

DC 228 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration (factory default);

450 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

DD 300 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

550 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-22

DE 376 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

700 ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

DF 752 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes) output pulse

duration;

1300ms (ATA single mode) output pulse duration

Note: The first character of the output pulse duration value is alpha; the second char-

acter is numeric.

Table 7-8 shows the output0 and output1 open/closed conditions for the output status

displays.

Table 7-9 shows the input0 and input1 open/closed conditions for the input status dis-

plays.

527 Display RF Status**

Command #527 displays the current status of the RF module. The reader response

indicates whether RF is controlled externally by the host, set by command #640N RF

Control, or internally by input set by command #641. Command #527 also displays

the current RF status and the uniqueness timeout, which is fixed at two minutes.

Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status

Output

Status

Output0 Wire Pair Output1 Wire Pair

Orange/Black Brown/Black White/Black Green/Black

O0 Closed Open Closed Open

O1 Open Closed Closed Open

O2 Closed Open Open Closed

O3 Open Closed Open Closed

Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status

Input

Status

Input0 Wire Pair Input1 Wire Pair

Green/Red Blue/Black

I0 Open Open

I1 Closed Open

I2 Open Closed

I3 Closed Closed

Commands

7-23

Note: The fixed uniqueness timeout period of two minutes may vary slightly depend-

ing on the operative tag read mode and the tag in the read field.

Reader response:

RFST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 1> T1 Fx Rxx Gxx Axx

where

C0 RF controlled by host

C1 RF controlled by presence sensor on input0, the red/green pair

(factory default)

O0 RF off

O1 RF on

T1 Uniqueness timeout of two minutes (fixed)

Fxx RF output frequency, xx = 00 to 34 hexadecimal offset in 500

kHz from 902 MHz. If an invalid frequency value is stored

(corrupted NVRAM), then xx = “XX” to indicate an error in the

frequency setting.

Rxx Tag decoder range (distance) for ATA tags, xx = 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Gxx** Tag decoder range (distance) for Intellitag tags, xx = 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Axx** RF power attenuation, where 00 is maximum output power and

0A is minimum output power (10dB less than maximum power).

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is:

RFST C1 O0 T1 F1A R1F G1F A00

which means that RF is enabled by presence sensor on input0, RF signal off, and

uniqueness timeout of two minutes, RF output frequency of 915 MHz, maximum RF

output range for ATA tags, maximum RF output range for Intellitag tags, and full RF

power.

529 Display Presence Input Status

Command #529 displays the parameters associated with presence detection and RF

control. The reader’s message indicates if presence without tag reports are enabled/

disabled (#690N Select Presence without Tag Report Option), if input inversion is

enabled/disabled (#694N Select Input Inversion Option), and the minimum presence

true period (always true). The reader’s message also reports the selected RF timeout

(#693N Select RF Timeout Period) and the selected means of RF-off control (#692N

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-24

Select RF Control Algorithm). If presence without tag reports is enabled (#6901

Enable Presence without Tag Reports), the reader transmits a report if a presence is

detected without the subsequent acquisition of a valid tag.

Note: RF timeout values vary depending on the operative tag read mode and the type

of tag in the read field. All times are approximate.

Reader response:

PRST P<0 to 1> D0 A<0 to 2> T<0 to F> I<0 to 1>

where

P0 Presence without tag reports disabled (factory default)

P1 Presence without tag reports enabled

D0 Minimum presence true period of 0 ms (fixed)

A0 RF off on timeout only

A1 RF off on timeout or tag

A2 RF off on timeout or presence condition false (factory default)

T0 RF timeout of 0 ms (always expired)

T1 to T7 RF timeout of 48 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 150 ms (ATA single mode)

T8 RF timeout of 60 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 175 ms (ATA single mode)

T9 RF timeout of 92 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 200 ms (ATA single mode)

TA RF timeout of 152 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 370 ms (ATA single mode)

TB RF timeout of 300 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 680 ms (ATA single mode)

TC RF timeout of 452 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1000 ms (ATA single mode)

TD RF timeout of 600 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1250 ms (ATA single mode)

TE RF timeout of 752 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1500 ms (ATA single mode)

Commands

7-25

TF RF timeout infinite, never expires (factory default)

I0 input inversion disabled (factory default)

I1 input inversion enabled

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

PRST P0 D0 A2 TF I0

which means that presence without tag reports is disabled, minimum presence true

period is 0, RF off control on timeout or presence false, infinite RF timeout, and input

inversion disabled.

530 Display RF0 Filter Status*

Command #530 displays the parameter set for the RF channel input, including the

selected unique ID code criteria (#410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria) and the valid

ID code criteria, which are fixed at one acquisition.

Reader response:

RF0S U<0 to 2> V0

where

U0 One ID separation (factory default)

U1 Two ID separations

U2 Transmit all IDs

V0 Valid ID code criteria of one acquisition (fixed)

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

RF0S U0 V0

which means separation of one ID for uniqueness filtering and a valid ID code criteria

of one acquisition.

532 Display Wiegand Mode Status

Command #532 displays the Wiegand mode status as either enabled or disabled.

Reader response:

TOF <0 to 1>

where

0Wiegand mode disabled

1Wiegand mode enabled

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-26

533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #533 displays the Wiegand retransmit interval. This interval specifies the

delay in seconds before the reader retransmits Wiegand data for a tag still in the read

zone. The factory default is 1 second.

Reader response:

WTI <01 to FF>

where 01 to FF = seconds (1–255) in hexadecimal.

Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the

operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The retransmit interval in ATA

tag read mode is about twice these values.

534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status

Command 534 displays tag translation mode status, enabled or disabled. If tag

translation mode is enabled, incoming full-frame tags in AAR or ATA format are

translated according to ISO standards. Refer to “452 Disable Tag Translation Mode

(Factory Default)” on page 7-13 and “453 Enable Tag Translation Mode” on page 7-

13 for more information.

Reader message:

TT <0 to 1>

where:

0tag translation mode disabled

1tag translation mode enabled

535 Display Buffer Control Status

Command 535 displays buffer control mode status, enabled or disabled. Refer to

“6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default)” on page 7-31 and “6161

Enable Buffer Control Mode” on page 7-31 for more information.

Reader message:

BCM <0 to 1>

where:

0buffer control mode disabled

1buffer control mode enabled

537 Display Echo Status

Command #537 displays echo mode status. In basic protocol (#610 Select Basic

Protocol), the reader may be configured to enable (#6171 Enable Echo Mode) or dis-

able (#6170 Disable Echo Mode) the echo of received commands. Refer to sections

“6170 Disable Echo Mode” and “6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)” on page

7-33 for more information.

Commands

7-27

Reader response:

ECHO <0 to 1>

where

0Echo status disabled (factory default)

1Echo status enabled

540 Display Flash Checksum

Command #540 displays the flash memory checksum.

Reader response:

PCKS I0000 Exxxx

where

0000 Not applicable to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

xxxx Represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the flash

memory checksum

543 Display Boot Checksum

Command #543 displays the boot ROM checksum.

Reader response:

BCKS xxxx

where xxxx represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the boot ROM check-

sum.

560 Request Sensor Status Change

Command #560 displays the sensor status change reporting. Status change reporting

may be disabled by command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option.

Reader response:

SSTC E<0 to 1>M<0 to 3>

where

E0 Input status change reports disabled (factory default)

E1 Input status change reports enabled

M0 Reporting disabled (factory default)

M1 Changes on input0 reported

M2 Changes on input1 reported

M3 Changes on either input reported

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-28

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

SSTC E0 M0

which means that input status change reports are disabled on both input0 and input1.

570 Display Tag Mode Status**

Command #570 displays the currently selected tag read mode.

Reader response:

IT500:<I, F, D, or NI> ATA:<E or D>

where

I IT500 ID (64 bits)

EEnabled

FFull transaction

DDisabled

M Multi-tag sort enabled

NI No EAC check

Table 7-10 shows reader command #47N Select Tag Mode, corresponding tag modes,

and data read in each mode, when multi-tag sort is disabled.

Commands

7-29

Table 7-10 Tag Read Mode Status

Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6

Group 6 commands set reader control functions such as reader ID, communication

protocol, output pulse, and RF control.

60NN Set Reader ID Number

Command #60NN sets the reader ID that will be sent in the auxiliary data field (com-

mand #311). Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex

digits A though F or a through f

where NN = 00 to FF (hex for 0 to 255, factory default = 00).

Reader response:

Done

610 Enable Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)

Command #610 enables the basic communications protocol. Refer to “Basic Protocol”

on page 6-4 for more information.

Reader response:

Done or Error

611 Enable Error Correcting Protocol

Command 611 enables the error correcting protocol. Refer to “Error Correcting Proto-

col” on page 6-4 for more information.

Reader

Command Tag Read Mode

Status Tags Read

470 IT500:F ATA:E Read eATA data from Intellitag and read

ATA tags.

471 IT500:D ATA:E Read ATA data from ATA tags.

472 IT500:I ATA:D Read 64 bit ID data from Intellitag ignore

ATA tags.

473 (default) IT500:F ATA:D Read eATA data from Intellitag ignore ATA

tags.

474 IT500:I ATA:E Read 64 bit ID data from Intellitag and read

ATA tags.

477 IT500:NI ATA:D Reads the 64-bit ID data from all Intellitag-

based tags regardless of the factory

programming of the embedded application

code (EAC) in tag memory bytes 10

through 17.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-30

Reader response:

Done

Caution

Do not switch to ECP (command #611 Select Error Correcting Protocol) unless

the host is prepared to acknowledge each reader transmission.

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout

Command #612NN selects the timeout interval for ECP. This timeout applies to the

transmission of tag, report, and error messages and to the receipt of host commands.

The transmit timeout is initiated immediately after the end-of-message sequence CR/

LF is transmitted. If the host does not acknowledge the message within the specified

interval, the reader times out and retransmits the message.

The receive timeout is initiated upon receipt of the start-of-message character (#). If

the end-of-message character (CR) is not received within the specified interval, the

reader discards the partially received message and resets its receiver.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f.

The value for NN specifies the timeout interval as follows:

ms 50 * NN for NN = 01 to FE (1–254)

FE Factory default (12,700 ms, 12.7 seconds)

FF Disables the ECP timeout

Note: The actual value of the ECP timeout may vary depending on the operative tag

read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Reader response:

Done or Error

Caution

Ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for a given baud rate. See “Timing and

Synchronization” on page 6-11.

613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol

Command 613 enable the data inquiry protocol. Reader message:

Done or Error

614N Select Flow Control Option

Command #614N selects the flow control option for reader-to-host communications.

The factory default setting is software flow control (XON/XOFF) enabled. In down-

load mode, flow control is not host-selectable; it is fixed at the default setting. How-

ever, during data mode and command mode operation, the following flow control

options are available. The N variable specifies flow control as shown in Table 7-11.

Commands

7-31

Reader response:

Done

If the reader is configured for software flow control (XON/XOFF), it stops transmit-

ting if it receives an XOFF character (host software command 13H). It does not

resume transmitting until it receives an XON character (host software command 11H).

If the reader is configured for hardware flow control (RTS/CTS, request to send/clear

to send), it stops transmission if it detects that the CTS line is no longer asserted. It

resumes transmission when this line is asserted again.

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

the ECP.

6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default)

Command 6160 is used to disable buffer control. Buffer control is an ECP option that

prevents unsolicited (asynchronous) reader transmissions. If buffer control is not

active, the reader transmits data to the host as soon as the data is acquired. The host

must acknowledge the data according to the ECP acknowledgment/negative

acknowledgment (ACK/NAK) protocol. Refer to command 6161 for more information.

Reader message:

Done

6161 Enable Buffer Control Mode

Command 6161 is used to enable buffer control. Buffer control is an ECP option that

prevents asynchronous reader transmissions. When buffer control is enabled using

command 6161, the reader transmits only in response to command 06, transmit buffer

entry. The exception to this rule occurs on startup when the reader transmits its two-

line sign-on message asynchronously.

The following commands are used for buffer control:

Table 7-11 Flow Control Commands

Command Flow Control Option

6140 Disable flow control

6141 Enable software flow control (factory default)

6142 Enable hardware flow control

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-32

If BCM is enabled, the host must request tag IDs and reports from the reader using the

transmit buffer entry command 06. If the reader receives this command and it has data

in its buffer, it will transmit the buffered message of highest priority (tag IDs first and

then reports). If the reader’s buffer is empty, it will transmit the Done message instead.

The reader will return an Error message if it receives command 06 when BCM is not

enabled.

If buffer control is enabled, the reader will not support ECP ACK or NAK messages

from the host. Since all messages are transmitted in response to a host command,

acknowledgment from the host is not required. Instead, the ECP sequence numbers

are used to ensure data integrity. If the host receives an erroneous reader message, it

should retransmit command 06, transmit buffer entry, with the same sequence number.

This will cause the reader to search and replace its previous message.

If buffer control is enabled, the reader will not use the timeout to trigger re-

transmission of data because in buffer control, reader data is transmitted only when

requested by the host.

Reader message:

Done

Buffer Control Error Messages

The error messages shown in the following table are transmitted based on the content

level of the tag buffer. These messages are transmitted in data mode and command

mode. They will not be transmitted if uniqueness checking has been disabled to trans-

mit all IDs (command 40) or buffer all IDs (command 43).

Number Command Description Message

06 Transmit buffer entry Done, error, or <message>

535 Display buffer control status where

x= 0 for disabled

1 for enabled

BCM x

6160 Disable buffer control mode (default) Done

6161 Enable buffer control mode Done

Commands

7-33

If the buffer fills up and then transmission is re-enabled, the sequence of transmitted

reports would be as follows:

Error 04 75% full

Error 02 100% full

Error 03 emptied to less than 100%

Error 05 emptied to 50% or less

6170 Disable Echo Mode

Command #6170 disables the reader’s echo of received host commands. If operating

in basic protocol or data inquiry protocol, the reader echoes by default. As the reader

receives a host command, it echoes each character of the command. Once the entire

command has been received and processed, the reader transmits its response. If echo-

ing is disabled with command #6170, the reader does not echo the command, but only

transmits its response. The reader never echoes while in ECP or download mode oper-

ation.

Reader response:

Done

6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)

Command #6171 enables the reader to echo received host commands. Command

6170 disables echo mode.

Reader response is Done or Error.

620N Set Output Control

Command #620N provides direct control of two output lines that may be used to

operate external hardware, such as gates or traffic lights. The value for N specifies the

output status requested as shown in Table 7-12. Receipt of any #620N command auto-

matically disables command #621 Predefined Output Control.

Error Message Buffer Status

Error02 Tag buffer is full. Incoming IDs cannot be buffered. An overflow

of the tag buffer can occur if SmartPass is left in command

mode or if flow control has disabled transmission. A buffer

overflow results in subsequent tag IDs being lost.

Error03 Tag buffer has been partially cleared and new IDs are once

again being stored.

Error04 Tag buffer has filled to 75%.

Error05 Tag buffer has emptied to 50%.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-34

Reader response:

Done

621 Predefined Output Control (Factory Default)

Command #621 configures the reader for predefined output mode. In this mode, both

output lines – output0 and output1 – are automatically asserted upon receipt of a valid

unique tag ID. The output line remains asserted for the time specified by output pulse

duration (#67N Set Output Pulse Duration). Any direct control command (#620N

Output Control) automatically disables the predefined output mode.

Reader response:

Done

63 Reset Reader

Command #63 resets the power fail bit, clears all buffers, resets tag uniqueness, turns

off both output lines, transmits the sign-on message, and returns to the data mode.

Note: This command does not reset any other configuration parameters.

Reader response:

Model E4 TBD Series Ver X.XX SNYYYYYY

where

X.XXD Version number.

YYYYYY Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on

the reader product label.

640N RF Control*

Command #640N directly controls the RF module. The N value controls the RF

power as shown in Table 7-13.

Table 7-12 Output Control Commands

Command Output Control Option

6200 Turn off both output ports

6201 Turn off output1, Turn on output0

6202 Turn off output0, Turn on output1

6203 Turn on both output ports (default)

Commands

7-35

Command #6400 disables RF-by-input control command #641 Select RF-by-Input

Control.

Reader response:

Done

641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default)

Command #641 configures the reader for RF-by-input control. The reader automati-

cally turns on RF when it detects a presence through sense0. The reader turns off RF

according to the selected RF control algorithm (#692N Select RF Control Algorithm).

Reader response:

Done

642NN Select RF Operating Frequency

Command #642NN sets the reader RF frequency from 902 to 928 MHz in 500-kHz

steps, where NN is a hexadecimal value from 01 to 34. After the reader’s frequency is

set, the value is stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM). This value is not altered by

power-down. It can be changed by issuing command #642NN, loading default param-

eters, or a flash download of new software.

Caution

The authorized frequency band for the TransCore Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader in the United States is 912.5 to 919 MHz. Contact TransCore if your applica-

tion requires a frequency outside of this range.

If the NVRAM becomes corrupted, the correct operating frequency cannot be guaran-

teed. In this circumstance, the RF section shuts down and the reader sends an

Error06 message to the host. Until the frequency is reset using command #642NN,

the unit displays the same error message every time it is powered up or if an attempt is

made to enable the RF by host or by external sensor.

Table 7-13 RF Control Commands

Command RF Power

6400 Turns off RF channel

6402* Turns on continuous wave RF until

command 6400 or 641 is received by

the reader.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-36

The commands to set the RF frequency are presented in Table 7-14.

Table 7-14 Select RF Frequency Commands

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Approved for Use in the U.S.

64200 902 No

64201 902.5 No

64202 903 No

64203 903.5 No

64204 904 No

64205 904.5 No

64206 905 No

64207 905.5 No

64208 906 No

62409 906.5 No

6420A 907 No

6420B 907.5 No

6420C 908 No

6420D 908.5 No

6420E 909 No

6420F 909.5 No

64210 910 No

64211 910.5 No

64212 911 No

64213 911.5 No

64214 912 No

64215 912.5 Yes

64216 913 Yes

64217 913.5 Yes

64218 914 Yes

64219 914.5 Yes

6421A 915 (factory default) Yes

Commands

7-37

Reader response:

Done

6421B 915.5 Yes

6421C 916 Yes

6421D 916.5 Yes

6421E 917 Yes

6421F 917.5 Yes

64220 918 Yes

64221 918.5 Yes

64222 919 Yes

64223 919.5 No

64224 920 No

64225 920.5 No

64226 921 No

64227 921.5 No

64228 922 No

64229 922.5 No

6422A 923 No

6422B 923.5 No

6422C 924 No

6422D 924.5 No

6422E 925 No

6422F 925.5 No

64230 926 No

64231 926.5 No

64232 927 No

64233 927.5 No

64234 928 No

Table 7-14 Select RF Frequency Commands (continued)

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Approved for Use in the U.S.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-38

643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)

Command #643NN selects the read range where NN is a hexadecimal value from 00

to 1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The range can be adjusted for 32

discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is the longest range. The default

range value is 1F.

Reader response:

Done

644NN Set RF Attenuation**

Command #644NN sets the attenuation control for the output RF power where NN is

a hexidecimal value from 00 to 0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments

over a range of 10 dB of attenuation from the maximum power setting of two watts at

0-dB attenuation to a minimum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10-dB attenuation.

The Set RF Attenuation command NN variables and corresponding attenuation set-

tings are shown in Table 7-15.

Reader response:

Done

Table 7-15 RF Attenuation Command Variables

Variable (NN) Attenuation

Setting (dB)

00 0 (factory default)

01 1

02 2

03 3

04 4

05 5

06 6

07 7

08 8

09 9

0A 10

Commands

7-39

645NN Set Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Operat-

ing Range

(Distance)**

Command #645NN sets the read range where NN is a hexadecimal value from 00 to

1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The range can be adjusted for 32

discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is the longest range. The default

range value is 1F.

Reader response:

Done

65 Reset Power Fail Bit

Command #65 resets the power fail bit to 0. The bit changes from 0 to 1 when power

is restored to the reader. Upon reader power-up, the host transmits either command

#65 or #63 Reset Reader to properly initialize this bit. The current state of the power

fail bit may be displayed. Refer to “520 Display Power Fail Bit” on page 7-18 for

more information.

Reader response:

Done

66F Load Default Operating Parameters

Command #66F loads all the factory default operating parameters except RF operat-

ing frequency. Refer to Table 8-2, Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default

Configuration Settings” for a listing of the defaults.

Reader response:

Done All parameters loaded OK

Error A parameter load failed

660 Test External RAM

Command 660 performs a read/write test of external data memory

(32 K). The contents of RAM are not disturbed by this test. Command 660 updates

information displayed by the display diagnostic results command 661.

Reader message:

Done passed RAM test

Error failed RAM test

661 Display Diagnostic Results

Command 661 displays the results of previously performed diagnostics. The

information displayed by this command is updated when the reader receives any

diagnostic command. This information is preserved after power-down. Executing

command 669 updates every field in this message. If diagnostics have never been

performed, the information displayed by this command is not predictable.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-40

Reader message:

DIAG R<0 to 1> E<0 to 1> D<0 to 1> C<0 to 1>

where:

R0 boot ROM OK

R1 boot failed

E0 flash memory OK

E1 flash memory failed

D0 external RAM OK

D1 external RAM failed

C0 RTC OK

C1 RTC failed

664 Test Real-Time Clock

Command 664 tests the real-time clock (RTC). The reader tests the RTC by retrieving

both the date and time and verifying their validity. This command updates information

displayed by the display diagnostic results command 661.

Reader message:

Done real-time clock OK

Error real-time clock failed

667 Verify Boot ROM Checksum

Command 667 calculates and verifies the boot ROM checksum. This command

updates information displayed by the display diagnostic results command 661.

Reader message:

Done boot ROM OK

Error boot ROM failed

668 Verify Flash Memory Checksum

Command 668 calculates and verifies the flash memory checksum. This command

updates information displayed by the display diagnostic results command 661.

Reader message:

Done flash memory OK

Error flash memory failed

669 Perform All Diagnostics

Command 669 performs a test on each of the following items:

•External RAM

•Boot ROM

Commands

7-41

•Flash memory

•Real-time clock

This command also initiates a system check tag operation. This command updates

information displayed by the display diagnostic results command 661.

Reader message:

Done all tests OK

Error one or more failures

Use command 661 to display the diagnostic results.

67N Set Output Pulse Duration

Command #67N sets the output pulse duration for the command #621 Predefined

Output Control. This command specifies the length of time that output line(s) will be

asserted upon receipt of a valid and unique tag ID. The factory default setting is 228

ms. The variable N specifies an output pulse duration of 48 ms to 752 ms.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing

varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Values listed in the middle column of Table 7-15 assume an ID operational tag read

mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags) and an eGo tag in the read

field. Values in the right column of Table 7-15 assume an ATA operational tag read

mode (reads ATA data from ATA tags) and an ATA tag in the read field. Actual pulse

length output of the reader may vary from the specified value.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f. The command numbers and corresponding output pulse

durations are shown in Table 7-16.

Table 7-16 Output Pulse Duration Commands

Command

Approximate duration (ms)

for ID, IATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 tag read mode

operation

Approximate duration

(ms) for ATA tag read

mode operation

670 to 678 48 ms 130 ms

679 60 ms 140 ms

67A 76 190 ms

67B 152 ms 300 ms

67C 228 ms (factory default) 450 ms

67D 300 ms 550 ms

67E 376 ms 700 ms

67F 752 ms 1300 ms

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-42

For example, command #67F specifies an output pulse duration of 752 ms if the tag

read mode is ID, eATA, Dual 1, or Dual 2. See command #47N Select Tag Mode for

more information.

Additional IDs may be acquired during the selected output pulse duration; however,

the timing restarts upon each successive ID acquisition. This command should be used

with discretion. For example, when the tag acquisition interval is short compared to

the selected pulse duration, distinct pulses may not be generated.

Reader response:

Done or Error

690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option

Command #690N enables or disables the presence without tag report option. If the

presence without tag reporting option is enabled using command #6901, input

reports are transmitted when a tag presence is detected without the subsequent acqui-

sition of a valid tag. The value for N specifies the reports as shown in Table 7-17.

Reader response:

Done

Refer to “Basic Protocol and ECP Format” on page 6-5 for message format informa-

tion.

692N Select RF Control Algorithm

Command #692N selects the algorithm for turning off RF power when RF-by-input

control is enabled using command #641 Select RF-by-Input Control.

The values for N specify the RF control algorithms as shown in Table 7-18.

Table 7-17 Presence Without Tag Report Commands

Command Report Option

6900 Disable presence without tag reports (factory

default)

6901 Enable presence without tag reports

Table 7-18 RF Control Algorithm Commands

Command RF Power Off

6920 On timeout only

6921 Timeout or tag ID acquired

6922 Timeout or presence false (factory default)

Commands

7-43

Command #6920 turns off RF power based on the timeout established by command

#693N Select RF Timeout Period.

Command #6921 allows RF power to be turned off either after the timeout period or

upon acquisition of a valid tag ID, whichever occurs first.

Command #6922 turns off RF power either after the timeout period or upon the pres-

ence false condition, whichever occurs first.

Reader response:

Done

693N Select RF Timeout Period

Command #693N selects the RF timeout period used by command #692N Select RF

Control Algorithm. Values for N range from 0 through F.

Command #693F disables the RF timeout. The reader turns off the RF immediately

following the acquisition of a valid tag, whether or not it is unique. This control algo-

rithm may be used in Wiegand mode to ensure that the tag data is transmitted once and

only once per presence on both serial and Wiegand ports.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing

varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Values listed in the middle column of Table 7-19 assume an ID operational tag read

mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags) and an eGo tag in the read

field. Values in the right column of Table 7-19 assume an ATA operational tag read

mode (reads ATA data from ATA tags) and an ATA tag in the read field. Actual pulse

length output of the reader may vary from the specified value.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f. The commands and corresponding timeouts are shown in

Table 7-19.

Table 7-19 Timeout Period Values

Command Approximate timeout (ms) for

ID, IATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2

tag read mode operation

Approximate timeout (ms) for

ATA tag read mode operation

6930 0 (always expired) 0 (always expired)

6931 to 6937 48 ms 150 ms

6938 60 ms 175 ms

6939 92 ms 200 ms

693A 152 ms 370 ms

693B 300 ms 680 ms

693C 452 ms 1000 ms

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-44

Reader response:

Done or Error.

The reader returns an Error message if a valid hexadecimal digit is not substituted

for N in command #693N.

694N Select Input Inversion Option

Command #694N enables or disables input inversion. When inversion is enabled, an

open circuit input is interpreted as a closed circuit, and a closed circuit input is inter-

preted as an open circuit. This feature allows greater flexibility in the attachment of

external equipment to the reader inputs. For example, some proximity sensors indicate

presence with an open circuit. In this instance, command #6941 can enable input

inversion so that an open circuit input indicates a presence. The values for N represent

the two inversion options as shown in Table 7-20.

Reader response:

Done

695S...S Set Serial Number

Command #695 assigns the reader serial number according to the format:

695SSSSSS

where SSSSSS is the serial number.

The serial number may contain as many as six uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanu-

meric characters.

Note: The factory-assigned serial number of the reader contains seven characters.

However, to maintain backward compatibility, the reader software allows only six

693D 600 ms 1250 ms

693E 752 ms 1500 ms

693F Infinite (never expires, factory

default) Infinite (never expires, factory

default)

Table 7-20 Input Inversion Options

Command Option

6940 Disable input inversion (factory default)

6941 Enable input inversion

Table 7-19 Timeout Period Values (continued)

Command Approximate timeout (ms) for

ID, IATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2

tag read mode operation

Approximate timeout (ms) for

ATA tag read mode operation

Commands

7-45

characters to be entered. When setting the serial number, skip the fourth (middle)

character of the seven-character number shown on the reader product label.

Note: Once assigned, the serial number is preserved during power-down and the

loading of default parameters.

Reader response:

Done

696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String

Command #696S...S stores hardware configuration information into reader mem-

ory.

The hardware configuration string is assigned according to the following format:

696S...S

where S...S is the hardware configuration string that may contain as many as 20

uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanumeric characters.

Note: Once assigned, configuration information is preserved during power-down and

the loading of default parameters.

Reader response:

Done

Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8

Group 8 commands provide control of reader functions, such as the sense input lines.

82N Select Input Status Change Report Option

Command #82N selects the input lines to be monitored to report any change in input

status. The enabled input lines are monitored for any changes in the logic states. If a

change is detected, the reader generates an input status change message and treats it as

a tag ID. If the auxiliary information option is enabled, the input status field displays

the current input values. The value for N specifies the report options as shown in

Table 7-21.

Table 7-21 Input Status Change Report Options

Command Report Option

820 Disable status change reports (factory default)

821 Report change on input0

822 Report change on input1

823 Report changes on input0 and input1

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-46

Reader response:

Done

830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory

Default)

Command #830 is a default set in the factory to disable the automatic periodic RF sta-

tus report.

Reader response:

Done

831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report

Command #831 enables the automatic periodic RF status report. This function sends

out a periodic RF status report if no other message (a tag read) is sent from the reader

for a period of time. This message is the same message that would be sent in response

to the #527 Display RF Status command. Enabling this function is helpful in some

sites where there may not be much tag activity, and the user wants an automatic way to

ensure the communication channel with the reader is still intact. With this function

enabled, the host system will get a message from the reader at least every three min-

utes.

Reader response:

Done or Error.

Flash Memory Control — Command Group 9

Group 9 commands enables testing, erasing, and updating flash memory with new

software versions.

The reader must be operating in download mode (#05 Switch to Download Mode)

before it will accept any command group 9 commands. Refer to “Program Download”

on page 5-5 for download information.

90 Load Program Block

Command #90 transfers one Intel hex data record from an external host to the reader

flash memory. This command loads an entire program file into reader memory, one

block at a time. The flash memory must have been previously erased using command

#96 Erase Flash Memory.

Reader response:

Done Intel hex record has been received, stored, and verified

with no errors detected.

Read Error Error occurred during the transfer of the record.

Program Error Error occurred during the programming of the flash

memory.

Verify Error Error occurred during the verification of the

programmed data.

Commands

7-47

91 Verify Flash Checksum

Command #91 calculates a checksum on the flash memory and compares it against

the stored checksum.

Reader response:

Done Flash checksum verified

Error Flash checksum failed

96 Erase Flash Memory

Command #96 erases the flash memory. Once this command is executed, exit from

download mode is not possible until a new program is loaded into flash memory.

Reader response:

Done

97 Perform Destructive Flash Test

Command #97 performs a test on the flash memory. Various patterns are programmed

into the memory and verified. This test overwrites any program previously stored in

the flash memory; therefore, a download of software is required afterwards. Once this

command is executed, exit from download mode is not possible until a new program is

loaded into flash memory.

Reader response:

Done Flash memory OK

Error Flash memory failed

99 Exit Download Mode

Command #99 instructs the reader to exit download mode. The reader will re-execute

startup to ensure proper initialization of the reader. If the flash memory checksum is

verified, the reader displays the following sign-on message and enters data mode:

Model E4 TBD Series Ver X.XX SNYYYYYY

where

X.XXD Version number.

YYYYYY Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on

the reader product label.

If the flash checksum is not verified, the reader restarts in download mode and trans-

mits the boot sign-on message.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

7-48

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

8-3

Chapter 8

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

This chapter provides instructions for configuring the EncompassTM

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, including factory configuration parameter

defaults and how to use terminal emulation software to check and

change the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader factory

configuration defaults.

Configuring the Reader

After installing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, you need to configure its

operating parameters. Terminal settings should be initially set at 9600 baud, 8 data

bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control.

General Configuration Labeling

Each Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and its shipping carton are labeled to

indicate the unit’s general configuration. Table 8-1 contains explanations of the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader label fields.

As an example, a label reading 4xxx-100 indicates that this Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader is configured with RS–232 and Wiegand communications.

Default Operating Parameter Settings

Table 8-2 contains the factory default configuration settings for the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader operating parameters.The default configuration settings may not

be the correct operating configuration settings for a specific site. Changes to the con-

figuration settings may have to be made, depending on the site plan, as described in

Chapter 2 “Developing the Site Plan.”

Table 8-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Configuration Label Fields

Field Description

1st Model number

TBD

2nd Interface

100 = RS–232 and Wiegand

101 = RS–422 and Wiegand

102 = RS–485 and Wiegand (not available

at this time)

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-4

Review the default configurations shown in Table 8-2 to determine which parameters,

in addition to operating frequency and operating range, need to be adjusted. Refer to

Chapter 7, “Commands,” for a complete list of parameters and the corresponding

commands.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing

varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Table 8-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration

Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 1 1010

Parity None 1020

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

Alternative group select Disabled 452

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo tag initialization during multi-

tag sort aEnabled 456

Second alternative group selectaDisabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Select tag mode eATA mode 473

Third alternative group selectaDisabled 490

Fourth alternative group selectaDisabled 492

Fifth alternative group selectaDisabled 494

Reader ID number 00 6000

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP)

timeout 12.7 secc612FE

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Sense output control Predefined 621

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-5

a. Command supported only in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Software

Version 2.08 and later.

b. Local laws apply. The authorized frequency band for the TransCore Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader in the United States is 912.5 MHz to 919 MHz. Contact

TransCore if your application requires a frequency outside of this range.

c. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader system does not include a real-time

clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing

varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Unless stated otherwise, values listed for timing-related command variables assume

an ID operational tag read mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags) and

an eGo-compatible tag in the read field and these values may vary.

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

RF operating frequencyb915MHz 6421A

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader operating range Maximum 6451F

Sense output pulse duration 228 msc67C

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Serial number NNNNNN 695

Store hardware configuration Hardware configuration not

known 696

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status

reportaDisabled 830

Table 8-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration

Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-6

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation

Software

To configure the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using a PC and terminal

emulation software to manually enter Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader host

commands, follow the instructions in the section “Connecting the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader to the PC” on page 4-25. Then, enter the appropriate configura-

tion commands through the terminal emulation software on your PC.

See Chapter 7, “Commands,” for a detailed description of all available configuration

commands.

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software

You can use a PC and any terminal emulation software to enter the host commands to

download flash software, configure reader operating parameters, perform diagnostics,

and retrieve tag data. The following procedures show examples using Hyper Termi-

nal™, an application included with Microsoft Windows. Most terminal emulation

applications have a similar sequence for launching.

To start the terminal emulation software

1. At the command prompt, type your terminal emulation start command; or if

using Windows Hyper Terminal, select:

Programs>Accessories>Hyperterm

and press ENTER.

The application displays the Connection Description dialog box as shown in

Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-7

2. Enter a name for the session and click OK.

The application displays the Phone Number dialog box as shown in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box

3. From the Connect using pull-down list, choose the Com 1 option (or whichever

com port on the PC to which the RS-232 cable is attached) and click OK.

The application displays the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown in

Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box

4. In the pull-down lists on the COM1 Properties dialog box, choose the following

values:

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-8

•Bits per second: 9600 baud

•Data bits: 8

•Parity: None

•Stop bits: 1

•Flow control: None

Click OK.

The application displays the configparms - Hyper Terminal main screen as

shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen

Verifying Communications

You must verify that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and the PC or lap-

top are communicating.

To verify communications

1. Start the terminal emulation application as described previously in “Starting the

Terminal Emulation Software” on page 8-6.

Note: When testing the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using a laptop,

TransCore recommends that you configure laptop communication parameters to

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-9

match those of the host computer to which the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader will be connected after testing and configuration are completed.

2. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Upon startup, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader transmits a sign-on

message, displayed on the terminal emulation screen as shown in Figure 8-5, or a

boot ROM failure message.

Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message

The sign-on message appears as follows:

Model [software version] SNYYYYYY

[Copyright notice]

where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader skipping the fourth character printed on the reader product

label.

Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this

number appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored

into reader memory. Contact TransCore Technical Support.

If the flash memory checksum is not verifiable, the sign-on message appears as

follows:

Model [Model] Ver 0.00 E

[Copyright notice]

If the failure message version number equals 0.00 E and no serial number exists,

the flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader is operating out of boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader automatically enters download mode and waits for a new

program to be loaded into the flash memory. Follow the instructions in “Program

Download” on page 5-5.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-10

Communications can also be verified by using the command sequence in

Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Command Sequence to Verify Communications

3. If a successful sign-on message is not returned, check connections and

communications factors and correct any errors.

To check connections and communications factors

1. Confirm that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader has power.

2. Verify the connections between the PC and the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader.

3. Verify the receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connections.

4. If using handshaking, verify the RTS and CTS connections.

5. Verify the COM port settings for the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

using the instructions in “Serial Port Communications” on page 8-18.

Repeat the procedures in “Verifying Communications” on page 8-8.

If you still cannot verify the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and PC commu-

nications, use the information in “Technical Support” on page 9-7 to contact

TransCore.

Verifying Tag Read Capability

After verifying communications between the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader and the PC, verify the capability to read tags.

Note: Default tag read mode of the reader is eATA. If test tags are standard ATA-pro-

tocol tags, change tag read mode of the reader by issuing command #47N Select Tag

Mode and using value #470 Dual 1.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using an external

antenna, you must connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Entry Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader to command

mode.

#505 <CR> #Model eGo 2000 Ver X.0X

SN97001P <CR/LF> Reports the software version and

serial number.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader to data mode.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-11

To verify tag read capability

1. Once communications are verified as described in “Verifying Communications"

on page 8-8, enter the following sequence of commands to turn on continuous

RF:

• #0121

• #6401

• #470

•#00

2. Pass one test tag in front of the unit. If the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader reads the tag, the terminal emulation application displays the tag

information on the screen as shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read

If the tag ID is not displayed, perform the following actions:

•Verify that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in data

mode (command #00 Switch to Data Mode).

•Ensure that the tag you are using is compatible with the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader has the capability to read the eGo

Windshield Sticker Tag as well as tags compliant with ATA and

ISO standards, including TransCore’s IT2000 tags with the ATA/

ISO mode enabled.

•A full-frame Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader displays

either half or full-frame ATA-protocol tags. If you are using half-

frame Wiegand Windshield Sticker Tags, you might not see any

tag ID information displayed.

•Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Using an Audible

Circuit Tester” on page 4-5, verify that the reader is capable of

reading the tag in the read zone. If it is, the problem is probably in

the communications between the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader and the host.

Successful

Tag Read

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-12

3. Pass a different test tag in front of your Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Note: An internal timer in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader causes

the reader to ignore a specific tag for two minutes or more after a good read

unless a different tag is read in the interim.The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol internal timing varies depending on the operative tag read mode

and the type of tag in the read field.

4. When the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader reads the second tag

successfully, the terminal emulation application displays that tag’s information in

the main screen below the information for the first tag, as shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read

If the read is unsuccessful, perform the following actions:

•Ensure the tag you are using is compatible with the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

•Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Using an Audible

Circuit Tester” on page 4-5, verify that the reader is capable of

reading the tag in the read zone. If it is, the problem is probably in

the communications between the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader and the host computer.

Configuring Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Parame-

ters

Follow the procedures in this section to configure Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

parameters using a PC, laptop, or terminal emulator. The PC or laptop must be con-

nected to and communicating with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, and

the terminal emulation application must be configured correctly, as described in the

section “Verifying Communications” on page 8-8.

Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface

before attempting to send commands to the reader. You can leave the Wiegand inter-

face connected during this procedure.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-13

To configure parameters

1. Switch to command mode by typing #01 at the prompt on the terminal

emulation screen, and pressing ENTER.

Note: All Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader commands are preceded by the

start-of-message character (#).

2. To meet requirements of your site, make changes to default operating parameters

as described in the following sections.

The following sections contain procedures to set some of the parameters that are

commonly changed to meet the requirements of a specific site. Procedures are

listed in alphabetical order by parameter.

Appended Tag Data

Use this procedure to set appended tag data parameters using the terminal emulation

application. See “31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection” on page 7-10 for

more information.

To set appended tag data parameters

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #311 to append auxiliary information or command #310 to

have no auxiliary information appended (factory default). Press ENTER.

ID Separation

The host can select a unique ID separation of one ID or two IDs. The uniqueness

timeout is fixed at two minutes. The reader default operation is for a unique ID separa-

tion of one ID and a uniqueness timeout of two minutes. You can disable the unique-

ness check using command #40 Transmit All ID Codes. In this case, every tag ID

received is transmitted without regard to uniqueness. You can reinstate uniqueness

checking with commands #4100 or #4101 Select ID Separation.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing

varies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

See section “40 Transmit All ID Codes” on page 7-11 and section “410N Select

Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)” on page 7-11.

To set ID separation parameters

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #4100 to select a separation of one ID; enter command #4101

to select a separation of two IDs. Press ENTER.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-14

Reports

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader can be configured to transmit presence

without tag reports and input status change reports. A presence without tag report is

transmitted in data mode only, and only if the system has a presence detector. This

report is sent if a presence is detected without the detection of a valid tag ID. See sec-

tions “529 Display Presence Input Status” on page 7-23 and “690N Select Presence

Without Tag Report Option” on page 7-42.

If configured with command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option to

transmit input status change reports, the reader will transmit a message to the host

computer any time the inputs change state. Input status change reports are transmitted

in data mode only. Input status change reporting is disabled by default. See sections

“560 Request Sensor Status Change” on page 7-27 and “82N Select Input Status

Change Report Option” on page 7-45. Also refer to Chapter 6, ”Communications Pro-

tocols” ” for information on message formats.

To set presence reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #529 to display presence input status and press ENTER. P0

indicates presence without tag reports disabled (factory default), and P1 indicates

presence without tag reports enabled.

3. Enter command #6901 to enable presence without tag reports, or enter

command #6900 to disable presence without tag reports (factory default). Press

ENTER.

To set input status change reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #560 to display input status change report options and press

ENTER.

• EO = input status change reports disabled (factory default)

• E1 = input status change reports enabled

• M0 = reporting disabled (factory default)

• M1 = changes on input0 reported

• M2 = changes on input1 reported

• M3 = changes on either input reported

3. Enter command #821 to report any change on input0, command #822 to report

any change on input 1, command #823 to report changes on input0 and input1,

or command #820 to disable status change reports (factory default). Press

ENTER.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-15

Reset Reader

Command #63 Reset Reader resets uniqueness, clears the power fail bit, and trans-

mits the sign-on message. The reader returns to data mode following the completion

of this command.

Note: This command does not reset any of the configuration parameters.

See “63 Reset Reader” on page 7-34.

To reset the reader

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #63. Press ENTER.

The terminal emulation screen displays the sign-on message as shown in Figure

8-5 on page 8-9.

Radio Frequency

Caution

The authorized frequency band for the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader in

the United States is 912.5 to 919 MHz. The RF for each Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader at the site must be set according to the frequency specified in the

FCC site license. Only trained, authorized installation and maintenance personnel

are permitted by FCC to set the RF.

By using the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader an authorized person can set

the frequency range from 902 to 928 MHz in 0.5 MHz steps. You can set the range by

using a terminal emulation program and issuing the frequency command, as discussed

in section “642NN Select RF Operating Frequency” on page 7-35.

To set the frequency range

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #642NN – where NN is a hexadecimal value from 00 to 34 –

and press ENTER. See command “642NN Select RF Operating Frequency” on

page 7-35 for a complete listing of the hexadecimal values and the corresponding

frequencies.

3. To verify that the RF has been changed to the proper setting, type in command

#527 to see the current frequency setting.

Caution

Contact TransCore if your application requires a frequency outside of the autho-

rized frequency range.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-16

RF Transmission

The RF transmission can be controlled by one of the following methods:

•Connecting a vehicle detector to the sense input0 circuit

•The host sending software commands to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

As a factory default, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is configured to

control the RF power with a vehicle detector.

Figure 8-8 illustrates the methods of controlling RF sense output.

Figure 8-8 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader RF Control Options

Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission

The vehicle detector can be a loop detector, an infrared sensor, or an ultrasonic detec-

tor that is connected to sense input0 to turn on the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader RF transmitter. In Figure 8-8, Option A shows a vehicle detector controlling

the RF transmitter. This operation is preferred because the RF transmits only when a

vehicle is in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader read zone. Command #641

Select RF-by-Input Control (factory default) must be enabled.

To set the option of the vehicle detector controlling the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #641. Press ENTER.

Leave the setting on RF-by-input control for normal operation.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-17

Host Controlling RF Transmission

In Figure 8-8, Option B shows the host controlling the RF transmitter.

If the vehicle detector is connected to the host computer, as shown in Option B, com-

mands #6400 RF Channel Off and #6401 RF Channel On sent from the host com-

puter turn on and off the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader RF transmitter.

Continuous RF Transmission

In Figure 8-8, Option C shows the test configuration controlling the RF transmitter. To

test the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader, as described in “Testing the Encom-

pass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-5, you

can turn on the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader RF transmitter continuously

by issuing command #6401.

You may also use command #6402 to turn on continuous wave RF for diagnostic

purposes. Entering this command transmits a continuous RF signal at the output fre-

quency and attenuation level as specified in the respective associated commands until

command #6400 RF Channel Off, #6401 RF Channel On, or #641 Select RF-by-

Input Control is received by the reader. Tags are not read in continuous wave mode.

See “640N RF Control*” on page 7-34 for more information.

Sense Inputs

Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader have two sense inputs — sense input0 and sense input1. The default

configuration uses sense input0 as the presence detection device line. RF power is

automatically turned on only when the presence detection device (loop detector or

other device) detects a presence. Sense input1 is not used directly by the reader; it is

used by the host computer to monitor an external device. The Encompass 4/4800 Mul-

tiprotocol Reader sense inputs are designed to connect to a dry contact closure.

You can configure the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader to generate input sta-

tus change reports, which are transmitted like tag IDs. The host can then respond

based on the true/false (closed/open) status of the sense inputs. See the section

“Reports” on page 8-14.

The following procedures describe how to set sense inputs using the terminal emula-

tion software. See commands “526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-20, “694N Select

Input Inversion Option” on page 7-44, and “82N Select Input Status Change Report

Option” on page 7-45 for more information.

To set sense inputs

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #526 to display the current input/output status. C0 = host

controls outputs; C1= predefined output mode; O0 = both outputs off; O1 =

output0 on; O2 = output1 on; O3 = both outputs on; I0 = both inputs false; I1 =

input0 true; I2 = input1 true.

3. Enter command #6940 to disable input inversion (factory default) or command

#6941 to enable input inversion, and press ENTER.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-18

Sense Output Devices

Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4/4800 Multi-

protocol Reader have two sense output circuits – sense output0 and sense output1.

By default, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader operates in predefined output

mode where sense output0 and sense output1 are asserted every time a unique valid

tag is read. Both sense output devices are asserted by issuing command #621 Pre-

defined Output Control. The devices are not asserted when tags are acquired in the

transmit all or buffer all ID mode or when the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader is operating in Wiegand mode. The sense output pulse duration is variable

(command #67N).

The host computer can disable the predefined sense output control by issuing com-

mand #6201 to turn sense output0 on or by issuing any of the following commands:

#6200 Turn Off Both Output Ports, #6201 Turn Off Output0, On Output1, #6202

Turn Off Output1, On Output0, or #6203 Turn On Both Output Ports. While under

host control, the sense outputs are not automatically asserted when a valid tag is read.

The host must issue command #621Predefined Output Mode to return to the pre-

defined mode.

Serial Port Communications

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader supports one communications port,

which can be ordered as either RS–232/Wiegand or RS–422/Wiegand. For the RS–

232 and RS–422 communications specifications, the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader maintains the following three sets of parameters that affect serial port com-

munications:

•Port configuration parameters (baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity)

•Communications protocols (basic, error correcting)

•Flow control scheme (none, software, hardware)

The default serial port configuration for each of these three parameters is as follows:

•9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

•Basic communications protocol

•Software flow control (XON/XOFF)

You can change these parameters in data mode and command mode operation by issu-

ing commands with the host computer. Use the following procedures to set serial port

communications parameters using the terminal emulation program.

Port Configuration Parameters

Use this procedure to set port configuration parameters using the terminal emulation

program. Consult sections “100N Select Baud Rate*" through “102N Select Parity”

on page 7-8.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-19

To set baud rate

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #100N and press ENTER.

To set stop bits

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #101N and press ENTER.

To set parity

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #102N and press ENTER.

Communications Protocol

Use the following procedures to set communications protocol. Consult sections “610

Enable Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)" through “612NN Select

Error Correcting Protocol Timeout” on page 7-30 for more information.

Caution

Do not switch to ECP (command #611) unless the host is prepared to acknowledge

each reader transmission.

To select a communications protocol

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #610 to select basic protocol (factory default) or command

#611 to select ECP and press ENTER.

Software Flow Control

Two modes of flow control are supported — software (XON/XOFF) and hardware

(CTS - clear to send). The host can enable or disable flow control with command

#614N Select Flow Control Option.

The host can use software control characters (XON/XOFF) or the hardware CTS

handshake line to interrupt reader transmissions. When the reader is configured for

software flow control, it stops transmitting if it receives the XOFF character from the

host (host software command 13H). It resumes transmitting only when it receives the

XON character (host software command 11H) from the host. Likewise, when the

reader is configured for hardware flow control, it stops transmitting if it detects that

the CTS line is no longer asserted. It resumes transmitting when this line is asserted. If

flow control is not needed, the reader should be configured for no flow control

(#6140 Disable Flow Control).

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

the error correcting protocol.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-20

Use the following procedure to set flow control parameters using the terminal emula-

tion program. See section “614N Select Flow Control Option” on page 7-30.

To select flow control

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #6140 to disable flow control, command #6141 to enable

software flow control (factory default), or command #6142 to enable hardware

flow control and press ENTER.

Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone

If the read zone is too wide or too deep for your application, it can be fine-tuned by

physically adjusting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or external antenna

mounting orientation, reprogramming the actual RF power output (#644NN Set RF

Attenuation), and/or reprogramming the RF sensitivity range (#643NN Select ATA

Operating Range and #645NN Select Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Oper-

ating Range). The combination of these adjustments allows you to confine the read

zone to the area where tagged vehicles pass. This operation also minimizes reading

unwanted vehicles in adjacent lanes or parking areas.

See sections “643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)” on page 7-38, “645NN

Set Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Operating Range (Distance)**” on page

7-39, and “644NN Set RF Attenuation**” on page 7-38 for more information.

Note: As described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-32, marking the read pat-

tern using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read

pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.

Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader mounting brackets and pointing the reader in the desired

direction. The unit should be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired

read zone.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader Antenna

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the antenna

mounting brackets and pointing the antenna in the desired direction. The unit should

be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired read zone.

Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power

You can make the read zone smaller by adjusting the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader RF power output from a maximum of 2 watts to a minimum of 200 milli-

watts using command #644NN Set RF Attenuation. Lowering the RF power has the

added benefit of reducing RF interference with adjacent lanes.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-21

To adjust the read zone by lowering output power

1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader using a terminal emulation program as described in section “Verifying

Communications” on page 8-8.

2. Mark the current read zone as described in section “Marking the Read Zone” on

page 4-32.

Caution

Test tags should be ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant tags, or eGo Windshield Sticker

Tags affixed to a piece of nonmetallic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 in (4.82

to 5.84 mm) in thickness. The eGo Windshield Sticker Tag has a reduced read range

when not attached to glass.

3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with

#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.

4. Enter in command #64401 to lower the RF power by 1 dB below 2 watts

(default). Press ENTER.

Note: In the command #644NN, NN can be any hexadecimal value from 00 to

0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments over a range of 10 dB of atten-

uation from the maximum power setting of 2 watts at 0 dB attenuation to a mini-

mum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10 dB attenuation. Increasing the

attenuation lowers the output RF power.

5. Switch to data mode by entering command #00 and pressing ENTER.

6. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired

read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter

the command #64402 to lower the output RF power another 1 dB. Continue

increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read zone.

7. Follow the steps in “Procedures” on page 4-32 to mark the new read zone on the

ground with tape or chalk.

When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and

real traffic by performing the following procedures:

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in data mode.

2. With the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader running, place one tag behind

your back while you hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the

data from the tag held in the read zone displays on the PC screen.

3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in

the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays

on the PC screen. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read

range.

4. If one or both tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read

Capability” on page 8-10.

5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the

read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-22

Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader read zone can be fine-tuned by using

command #643NN for ATA tag read mode or #645NN for Intellitag-based eGo tag

read mode to reprogram the RF sensitivity range. Sensitivity range adjustments have

less impact on the read pattern than RF power adjustment, thus RF power adjustment

should be used as the main read pattern adjustment tool. Sensitivity range control may

be helpful in stopping some tag reads on the very edges of the read pattern. To produce

a noticeable change in the read pattern, you must decrease the range sensitivity by

more than one increment.

To adjust the read zone by adjusting sensitivity range

1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader using a terminal emulation program as described in “Verifying

Communications” on page 8-8.

2. Mark the current read zone as described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-

32.

3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with

#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.

4. Enter command #64318 or #64518 to decrease the range sensitivity seven

increments below the maximum (default). Press ENTER.

Note: In the command #643NN or #645NN, NN can be any hexadecimal

value from 00 to 1F. The reader’s receiver becomes less sensitive to tag signals as

the value of NN is lowered from the maximum sensitivity of 1F to the minimum

sensitivity of 00.

5. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired

read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter

the command #64317 or #64517 to decrease the range another increment.

Continue increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read

zone.

6. Follow the steps in section “Procedures” on page 4-32 to mark the new read zone

on the ground with the tape or chalk.

When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and

real traffic by performing the following procedures.

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in data mode.

2. With the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader running, place one tag behind

your back while you hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the

data from the tag held in the read zone displays on the PC screen.

3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in

the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays

on the PC screen.

Configuring the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

8-23

4. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read range. If one or both

tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read Capability” on

page 8-10.

5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the

read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

8-24

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-3

Chapter 9

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

This chapter contains information for troubleshooting an EncompassTM

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and performing minimal maintenance

checks. It also includes information for returning products for repair,

obtaining support, and contact information for providing feedback and

suggestions to TransCore.

Error Messages

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader transmits an error message if a com-

mand received from the host is not a recognized command or if information supplied

with the command is not correct. The reader sends this message to diagnostic com-

mands if the reader fails the specified test.

Table 9-1 contains a list of error messages.

Table 9-1 Error Messages

Error

Message Description Corrective Action

Error06 NVRAM parameters have been lost. The

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

will not function properly because the RF

section is shut off until the frequency is

reset.

Reset the frequency using command

#642NN.

Error07 The RF phase locked loop (PLL) has lost

lock and is unable to operate at its

intended frequency. RF output is disabled

while the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader attempts to reset the PLL.

Reset the RF frequency. Refer to “Radio

Frequency” on page 8-15 for instructions.

Error08 The RF PLL has successfully regained

lock and has been reset to its proper

operating frequency. The RF section is

returned to its state prior to losing lock

(enabled/disabled). Error08 will only be

issued after Error07 has been issued.

No action necessary; the previous error

has been corrected.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

9-4

Troubleshooting

You can use the following table for troubleshooting. Should problems continue, con-

tact TransCore for return and replacement procedures. If you call Technical Support,

use the symptom number in Table 9-2 to reference the problem that you are having

with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Error09 The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader software has detected an old or

unsupported version of the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader hardware and

will not function. The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader is immediately placed

into download mode after issuing this

message. This error can only occur on

system power-up or reset.

The correct version of the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader software from

TransCore must be downloaded to the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Contact Technical Support as described on

page 9-7.

Error11 The operator is attempting to use an

Intellitag-based tag in Wiegand mode while

the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader is in ID-only mode, thus Wiegand

compatibility issues.

Reset mode using command #473 for

Intellitag-based tags only or #470 for

Intellitag-based/ATA tags.

Table 9-1 Error Messages (continued)

Error

Message Description Corrective Action

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

1 When performing a quick

test of the Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader,

the buzz box does not buzz.

Check all your wiring connections and antenna connections (if

using external antenna), and ensure that your buzz box is

functioning.

The wires from the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

are grouped in pairs. You could find more than one red wire,

more than one black wire, and so on. You must connect the

correct red and white wire pair to the leads from the battery.

Verify that RF is on as described in “Bench Testing the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Before Installation”

on page 4-12. Using a terminal emulation program, you may

switch to command mode and issue command #527 to

determine RF status. See page 7-22 for more information.

2 The baud rate is selected

correctly but nothing

happens.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is not

communicating with your PC. Check the power supply to your

PC, and check the connections between the PC and the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader. Try reversing the

receive and transmit connections.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-5

3 When testing the

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader, all the

wires are connected

correctly but the unit does

not respond.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader may not have

the software loaded inside the unit. Contact Technical Support

as described on page 9-7.

If you are using a terminal emulation program, check that the

terminal emulation setting on the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader is VT100.

Check that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

communication cable is connected to the correct COM port.

Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

Verify that the reader is in the correct tag read mode (#47N).

4 Strange signal responses

come from the Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

when tested with the PC.

Ensure that the reader is in the correct interface mode for the

test tag, i.e., Wiegand mode for a Wiegand tag.

Check the system defaults using a terminal emulation

program. Both PC and reader should be set to 9600 baud, 8

bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

5 When a tag is moved in front

of the reader or external

antenna, a clicking sound

comes from the Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader works! The

sound is the relay inside the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader that is controlled by a lock signal. The relay is

actuated when a tag is in the read zone.

6 Nothing happens when the

test tag is passed in front of

the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader or

external antenna.

Ensure that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is

powered on and is in predefined output mode. (#621)

Verify that the reader is in the correct tag read mode (#47N).

Verify that the reader is set to RF ON (#6401).

Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

7 The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader came

from another site and does

not work the way the factory

defaults indicate that it

should.

Different commands were probably used to support the other

site’s specific configuration. You can restore the factory

defaults by using a terminal emulation program to switch to

command mode and issuing command #66F Load Default

Operating Parameters. All factory defaults except RF

frequency will be restored.

8 When connected to a PC

that is running terminal

communications software, a

just-powered up Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

displays one of the following

messages:

#TBD Ver X SNYYYYYY

#[Copyright notice]

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader works! The

software is now loaded. YYYYYY is the TransCore-assigned

serial number for this Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader. However, if YYYYYY = 000000, a serial number has

never been assigned. If a serial number has not been

assigned to your Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader,

contact TransCore Technical Support. Note that each

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol unit must have its own

unique serial number.

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

9-6

aUse this number to reference the problem you are having with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

if you call Technical Support.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Repair

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is designed for whole-unit replacement

and is manufactured with surface-mounted components. It requires sophisticated test-

ing and repair equipment. All testing and repairs are performed at TransCore’s factory.

Please contact TransCore to obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) for

returning the reader.

9 The read zone is too small,

even before the RF power

and range control have been

adjusted.

If another Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in the

same area, ensure that it is operating on another frequency

that is at least 2 MHz different.

Check for possible interference from another nearby RF

source: fluorescent lights, neon signs, high voltage power

lines, nearby cellular telephone, or radio stations. Lights will

need to be removed or shielded. Point the Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader or external antenna in a different

direction to see if interference comes from only one direction.

You may require a different Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader that uses another frequency.

Verify that the RF power is set to an appropriate value.

Verify that the range adjustment is set to the maximum.

Verify that the reader is getting at least 16V.

10 The perimeter of the read

zone has been defined, but

there is a “hollow” spot in the

center of the zone that does

not read tags.

The angle of the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or

external antenna may need adjustment. Slightly tilt the

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader or external antenna

to a different angle to change either the length or width of the

read zone.

Check the range control adjustment. See “Radio Frequency”

on page 8-15.

11 The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader is

reading tags out of the

desired read zone, or cross-

lane reads are occurring.

Some interference from other RF or electrical sources may be

occurring. See “Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF

Signals” on page 2-19.

Verify that the read zone has been properly set up. See “Fine-

Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-20.

12 The Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader is not

providing any output to the

Wiegand interface.

Ensure that the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is in

Wiegand mode (#451). The default is either RS–232 or RS–

422 mode. Refer to “Wiegand Interface” on page 4-28.

Ensure the tags are properly programmed with Wiegand data.

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-7

Technical Support

Authorized dealers and distributors are responsible for the direct support of all cus-

tomers. Authorized dealers and distributors needing support can call

(800) 755-0378 and ask for Technical Support, which is available 24 hours a day. Send

faxes to (214) 461-6478 ATTN: Technical Support. Please be prepared to answer a

series of questions that are designed to direct you to the best TransCore support

resource available. These questions will relate to symptoms, configuration, model,

and tags used.

Note: End users and facility operators calling Technical Support will be referred to

the dealer responsible for the system sale.

Marketing Support

Dealers requiring marketing support may call TransCore Marketing at

(214) 461-4031, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, Monday through Fri-

day. Send faxes to (214) 461-6478 ATTN: TransCore Marketing.

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader or Have Suggestions?

Call (800) 755-0378, which is answered 24 hours a day, and ask for the TransCore

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader product manager. Send faxes to (214) 461-

6478 ATTN: Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader product manager.

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

9-8

Glossary

A-3

Appendix A

Glossary

AAR Association of American Railroads

AC alternating current

ACK acknowledge (data valid)

ANSI American National Standards Institute

antenna passive device that converts RF energy into magnetic energy (RF signal)

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASIC application-specific integrated circuit

ATA American Trucking Association

aux auxiliary

AWG AWG (American Wire Gauge) is a U.S. standard set of non-ferrous wire conductor

sizes

backscatter portion of an RF signal that is modulated by a tag and radiated back to the reader

baud measure of number of bits per second of a digital signal; for example, 9600 baud =

9600 bits per second

BCKS boot checksum

BCM buffer control mode

bps bits per second

byte a binary character; for example, one 8-bit ASCII character

check tag tag mounted inside a reader assembly, inside or in close proximity to an external

antenna that is used to check operation of the reader

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

A-4

cmd command

CTRL control

comm communications

command data set that is recognized by the receiving device as intending to elicit a specific

response

conduit flexible steel pipe use for electrical wiring

cps characters per second

CR carriage return

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CTS clear to send

data information that is processed by a computing device

DC direct current

DIAG diagnostic

ECP error correcting protocol

ECPS error correcting protocol status

eGo proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore tag products. A

registered trademark of TCP IP, Ltd.

Encompass proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore reader products. A

trademark of TC IP, Ltd.

eol end of line

eom end of message

EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory

Glossary

A-5

field physical area/space in which a tag can be read by the reader; also, an element of a data

record/frame. For example, division within a tag's data frame.

frames consecutive bits of data in memory that are read and written as a group

frequency bands a range of RF frequencies assigned for transmission by an RF device

hex hexadecimal

hexadecimal base 16 numbering system that uses the characters 0 though 9 and A through F to

resent the digits 0 through 16

host device, generally a computer, that is connected to the Encompass 4/4800 Multiproto-

col Reader through the communications port

I/O or IO circuits input/output circuits

ID identification; encoded information unique to a particular tag

INCITS American National Standards Institute International Committee for Information

Technology standards

Intellitag Proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant Intermec products. A

registered trademark of Intermec Technologies Corporation, a UNOVA Company.

interface connection point for communication with another device

IOST I/O status

ISO International Standardization Organization

LF line feed

mmeter

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

A-6

MHz megahertz

mode method of operation

ms milliseconds

NAK negative acknowledgment (data not valid)

passback used to refer to a tag ID that is not passed on to the tag buffer

PC personal computer

PCKS EPROM flash checksum

protocol specified convention for the format of data messages communicated between devices

PRST presence status

PWRB power fail bit

RAM random access memory

RDID reader ID

read process of acquiring data from a device; for example, from a tag or from computer

memory

reader controlled interrogating device capable of acquiring data from a device; for example,

acquiring and interrupting data from a tag

read zone the physical area in which a tag can be read by the reader

RF radio frequency

RFST RF status

RFID radio frequency identification

ROM read-only memory

RTC real-time clock

Glossary

A-7

RTS request-to-send

SCTS status of check tag status

SSTC input status change reporting options

som start of message

SN serial number

tag small self-contained device acting as an identifying transponder

Tau timeout delay

TT tag translation

Vvolts

Ver version (software)

Wiegand the trade name for a technology used in card readers and sensors, particularly for

access control applications. Wiegand devices were originally developed by HID

Corporation.

write process of recording data; for example, writing to computer memory or to a tag’s

memory. Writing writes over (erases) previous data stored at the specified memory

locations.

WTI Wiegand retransmit interval

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

A-8

XON/XOFF protocol for controlling the flow of data between computers and other devices on an

asynchronous serial connection. X/ON and X/OFF are signals to turn a transmitter on

or off. The actual signal for X/ON is the same bit configuration as the ASCII Ctrl-Q

keyboard combination (11 hexadecimal). The X/OFF signal is the Ctrl-S character (13

hexadecimal).

Technical Specifications

B-3

Appendix B

Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications

Communications

Hardware Features

Power Requirements

Frequency Selection 902 to 928 MHz capable

912.5 to 919 MHz FCC-authorized in the United

Statesa

a. Operation in the United States is regulated by the FCC. Local

regulations apply. The user is required to obtain a license issued

by the FCC. Contact TransCore for more information.

Reading Range Read performance varies depending on tag,

reader, and external antenna (if required) config-

uration and environment. Optimum read range

using the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag is 24.3 ft

(7.4 m).

Typical read range should be 12 to 17 ft (3.7 to

5.2 m).b

b. Reading range depends on reader or external antenna configu-

ration, tag type, tag read mode, and operating environment.

Integrated System

and/or integrated sys-

tem with connector for

external antenna

RF module, tag decoder, external antenna (if

required), power supply, I/O ports, and serial

communications interface all housed in a single

package.

Case Weatherproof enclosure. The system is sealed in

a tamper-proof, polycarbonate housing.

Input Voltage 16 to 20V AC, 47 to 63 Hz

16 to 28V DC

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

B-4

Physical Attributes

Environmental Parameters

Options

Size 15.5 x 15.5 x 3.25 in (39.4 x 39.4 x 8.25 cm)

Weight 9.5 lb (4.3 kg)

Operating Temperature -40°F to +131°F

(-40°C to +55°C)

Humidity 100% noncondensing

Vibration Tolerance 0.5 Grms, 10 to 500 Hz

Communications Interface RS–232 and Wiegand or RS–422 and Wiegand

Cable Accessory Kits 58-1620-001: Connector with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable

58-1620-002: Connector with 20 ft (6.1 m) cable

58-1620-006: Connector with 35 ft (10.7 m)

cable

Wall Mount Bracket Allows adjustment in all planes when used to

install the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader on a flat surface. Include the part number

54-1620-001 when ordering.

Transformer A Class C transformer is available to allow 110V

AC to 18V AC conversion.

Include the part number 76-1620-005 when

ordering.

A Class C transformer (part number 76-1620-

008) to allow 220V AC to 18V AC conversion is

available by special request.

Wiring Tables

C-3

Appendix C

Wiring Tables

This appendix contains tables that show the wiring connections used to

test and install the EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader.

Communications Interfaces

Table C-1 lists the interfaces available with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader.

Figure C-1 shows the pin assignments for the RS–232 interface signal to the host male

DB9 and DB25 connectors.

Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements

Interface Number of

Conductors

RS–232 3

RS–232 with RTS and CTS hardware handshake signals 5

RS–422 4

Wiegand 3

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-4

Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host

Note: In Figure C-1, supported pin assignments are boldface.

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader is delivered with a multiwire cable

(ordered as a separate accessory), which is a 13-pair pigtail. An alternate 15-pair pig-

tail may be substituted. The 13-pair pigtail is a colored-wire pair cable, with different

colors denoting the individual pairs, one pair of which is red/black. The alternate 15-

pair pigtail is a red/black-wire pair cable, with numbers on the pairs to denote the indi-

vidual pairs. Two pairs of the 15-pair pigtail, numbers 14 and 15, are not used.

Wiring Tables

C-5

The following tables show the colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate wire pair

(15-pair) assignments for the various interfaces, power, and input/output connections.

RS–232 Interface

Table C-2 shows the RS–232 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader output Red/Black

Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader input

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader output Yellow/Red

Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader input

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-6

Table C-3 shows the RS–232 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

RS–422 Interface

Table C-4 shows the RS–422 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Pairing Color

TxD — Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader output Pair 1

Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD — Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader input

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Pair 5 Black or

Red Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader output Pair 11

Black Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS — Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader input

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow/Red Yellow Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Red/Black Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Wiring Tables

C-7

Table C-5 shows the RS–422 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Wiegand Interface

Table C-6 shows the Wiegand assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Signal Ground

Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Signal from

Host

Pairing Color

RS–422 Transmit positive Pair 11 Black Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Pair 1 Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

Wiegand Zero Output Blue/Red Blue Data0

Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Black Ground

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-8

Table C-7 shows the Wiegand assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Power Supply Connections

AC Power

Table C-8 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage AC power supply.

Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

Alternate Wire Cable

PairingColor

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wiegand Zero output Pair 10 Black Data0

Wiegand One output Red Data1

Signal Ground Pair 5 Black or Red Ground

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal From Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Transformer

Terminal Strip

Wire Pair from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

Main power input

Brown/Red and

Orange/Red

Brown/

Orange L1

16-20 V AC

Main power return Red/Red L2

16-20 V AC

Wiring Tables

C-9

Table C-9 shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-volt-

age AC power supply.

Low-Voltage DC Power

Table C-10 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage DC power supply.

Table C-11shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage DC power supply.

Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Transformer

Terminal

Strip

Pairing Color

Main power input

Pair 12 and

Pair 13

Black/Black L1

16-20 V AC

Main power return Red/Red L2

16-20 V AC

Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connection Use

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red

and

Orange/Red

Brown and

Orange 16 to 28 V DC + terminal

Main power return Red and

Red 16 to 28 V DC – terminal

Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader

Alternate Wire Cable

Connection Use

Pairing Color

Main power input Pair 12 and

Pair 13

Black and

Black 16 to 28 V DC + terminal

Main power return Red and Red 16 to 28 V DC – terminal

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-10

Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Table C-12 shows the sense input/output assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair)

cable.

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/

Red E Blue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control

applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control

applications

White/

Red L White Lock Tag lock output,

active-closed Testing

maintenance

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/

Red N Green Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and

presence detection

P Red Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and

presence detection

Blue/

Black R Blue Sense Input1 Sense Input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence

S Black Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence

Brown/

Black T Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched output to

control gate

U Brown Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched output to

control gate

Orange/

Black V Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Wiring Tables

C-11

Table C-13 shows the sense input/output assignments for alternate wire (15-pair)

cable.-

W Orange Sense Output

0_NC Sense Output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Green/

Black X Black Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

Y Green Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

White/

Black Z Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common Switched sense

output

a White Sense

Output1_NC Sense Output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black b Yellow GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–

232 and Wiegand

communications)

c Black GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–

232 and Wiegand

communications)

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pairing Pin Color

Pair 10 E Black WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control applications

Pair 8 L Black Lock Tag lock sense

output, active-

closed

Testing maintenance

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing maintenance

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-12

Pair 9 N Black Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and presence

detection

P Red Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not isolated

from signal ground

Loop and presence

detection

Pair 4 R Black Sense Input1 Sense Input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not used

to detect presence

S Red Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not isolated

from signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not used

to detect presence

Pair 6 T Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched sense

output to control gate

U Red Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output to control gate

Pair 7 V Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect output),

common terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control (light,

gate, buzzer, etc.)

W Red Sense

Output0_NC Sense Output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control (light,

gate, buzzer, etc.)

Pair 3 X Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

Y Red Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

Pair 2 Z Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

a Red Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Pair 5 b Black GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and

Wiegand

communications)

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Signal Description Typical Function

Pairing Pin Color

Wiring Tables

C-13

Summary Table

Table C-14 shows all assignments for both colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate

wire (15-pair) cables.

c Red GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and

Wiegand

communications)

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Signal Description Typical Function

Pairing Pin Color

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

Red/

Black

ABlack

Pair 1

Black TX232,

RX422+,

IF485-

RS–232 transmit,

RS–422 receive

positive, RS-485

negative

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader output, host

input

BRed Red RX232,

RX422-,

IF485+

RS–232 receive,

RS–422 receive

negative, RS-485

positive

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader input, host

output

Yellow/

Red

C Yellow

Pair 11

Black RTS232,

TX422 RS–232 request

to send or RS–

422 transmit

positive

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader output, host

input for hardware

handshaking

D Red Red CTS232,

TX422 RS–232 clear to

send or RS–422

transmit negative

Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol

Reader input, host

output for hardware

handshaking

Blue/

Red

EBlue

Pair 10

Black WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications

F Red Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control applications

Orange

/Red

GOrange

Pair 13 Black 18V Main power input

H Red Red 18V_RTN Main power return

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-14

Brown/

Red

JBrown

Pair 12 Black 18V Main power input

K Red Red 18V_RTN Main power return

White/

Red

LWhite

Pair 8

Black Lock Tag lock sense

output, active-

closed

Testing

maintenance

M Red Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/

Red

NGreen

Pair 9

Black Sense Input0 Sense input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and presence

detect

P Red Red Sense

Input0_RTN Sense input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and presence

detect

Blue/

Black

RBlue

Pair 4

Black Sense Input1 Sense input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence.

S Black Red Sense

Input1_RTN Sense input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence.

Brown/

Black

TBlack

Pair 6

Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched sense

output to control

gate

U Brown Red Sense

Output0_NO Sense output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output to control

gate

Orange

/Black

VBlack

Pair 7

Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

W Orange Red Sense

Output0_NC Sense output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

Wiring Tables

C-15

Green/

Black

XBlack

Pair 3

Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output.

Y Green Red Sense

Output1_NO Sense output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

White/

Black

ZBlack

Pair 2

Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

a White Red Sense

Output1_NC Sense output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black

b Yellow

Pair 5

Black GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–232

and Wiegand

communications)

c Black Red GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–232

and Wiegand

communications)

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

C-16

Command Quick Reference

D-3

Appendix D

Command Quick Reference

This appendix lists the default configuration settings for the

EncompassTM 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader and its commands.

Commands are listed both numerically and alphabetically.

Command Syntax

The command numbers consist of from 2 to 4 hex digits. The letters N or S may follow

a command number. The letter N indicates that part of the command number is vari-

able. The letter S indicates the requirement for an alphanumeric data string that is to

be included immediately following the command number. Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in

either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data strings and for hex digits

A–F. For more information see Chapter 5, “General Software Information.”

Table D-1 lists factory default settings. Table D-2 on page D-6 lists, in numerical

order, all of the commands available to users. Table D-3 on page D-16 lists the same

commands by command name.

Factory Default Settings

Note: Table D-1 lists the factory default settings for the Encompass 4/4800 Multipro-

tocol Reader.

Table D-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration

Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 1 1010

Parity None 1020

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

Alternative group select Disabled 452

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-4

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo tag initialization during multi-

tag sort Enabled 456

Second alternative group select Disabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Select tag mode eATA mode 473

Third alternative group select Disabled 490

Fourth alternative group select Disabled 492

Fifth alternative group select Disabled 494

Reader ID number 00 6000

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP)

timeout 12.7 secb612FE

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Sense output control Predefined 621

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

RF operating frequencya915MHz 6421A

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol

Reader operating range Maximum 6451F

Sense output pulse duration 228 msb67C

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Serial number NNNNNN 695

Table D-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration

Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Command Quick Reference

D-5

a. Local laws apply. The authorized frequency band for the TransCore Encompass 4/

4800 Multiprotocol Reader in the United States is 912.5 MHz to 919 MHz. Contact

TransCore if your application requires a frequency outside of this range.

b. The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader system does not include a real-time

clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing var-

ies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Unless stated otherwise, values listed for timing-related command variables assume

an ID operational tag read mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags) and

an eGo-compatible tag in the read field and these values may vary.

Numerical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-2:

•Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

•Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

•A single asterisk (*) indicates that the command has been altered so that it is dif-

ferent from the AI1620 SmartPass command.

•A double asterisk (**) indicates a new command or added value that is not present

in the AI1620 SmartPass command list.

•A triple asterisk (***) indicates an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader com-

mand that is supported only in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Soft-

ware Version TBD.

Refer to Chapter 6, “Communication Protocols,” for the complete syntax of com-

mands and messages.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader system does not include a real-time

clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing var-

ies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Unless stated otherwise, values listed for timing-related command variables assume

an ID operational tag read mode (64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags) and

an eGo tag in the read field and these values may vary. See Chapter 7, “Commands”

for more information.

Store hardware configuration Hardware configuration not

known 696

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status

report Disabled 830

Table D-1 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Default Configuration

Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-6

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically

Number Command Name Reader Message

00 Switch to data mode Done

01 Switch to command mode Done

05 Switch to download mode Done

1002*** Set baud rate = 1200 baud Done or Error

1003 Set baud rate = 2400 baud Done or Error

1004 Set baud rate = 4800 baud Done or Error

1005 Set baud rate = 9600 baud Done or Error

1006 Set baud rate = 19.2 K baud Done or Error

1007** Set baud rate = 38.4 K baud Done or Error

1010 Use one stop bit Done

1011 Use two stop bits Done

1020 Disable parity Done

1021 Select even parity Done

1022 Select odd parity Done

310 Disable aux info append Done or Error

311 Enable aux info append Done or Error

40 Transmit all IDs Done or Error

4100 Select one ID separation Done

4101 Select two ID separation Done

450 Disable Wiegand mode Done

451 Enable Wiegand mode Done or Error

452 Disable alternative group select Done

453 Enable alternative group select Done or Error

454 Disable multi-tag sort Done

455 Enable multi-tag sort Done or Error

456*** Enable eGo tag initialization

during multi-tag sort Done or Error

Command Quick Reference

D-7

457*** Disable eGo tag initialization

during multi-tag sort Done

458*** Disable second alternative

group select Done

459*** Enable second alternative group

select Done or Error

46NN Set Wiegand retransmit interval

NN = 01–FF seconds

01 =factory default

Done or Error

47N** Select tag mode

N = 0–4

0 = Dual (1); eATA (128 bits) and

ATA tags

1 = ATA tags only

2 = eATA ID only (64 bits)

3 = eATA (128 bits) tags only,

default

4 = eATA ID (64 bits) and ATA tags

7 = eATA ID (64 bits) no EAC

check

Done or Error

490*** Disable third alternative group

select Done

491*** Enable third alternative group

select Done or Error

492*** Disable fourth alternative group

select Done

493*** Enable fourth alternative group

select Done or Error

494*** Disable fifth alternative group

select Done

495*** Enable fifth alternative group

select Done or Error

505 Display version Model [model]

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

506 Display hardware configuration

information S...S

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 20

characters)

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-8

520 Display power fail bit PWRB Px R0

P0 = no power fail has occurred

P1 = power fail has occurred

521 Display reader ID number RDID xx

xx = 00–FF

522* Display comm port parameters* MAIN Bx Sx Px D0

B0 = 110*

B1 = 300*

B2 = 1200*

B3 = 2400

B4 = 4800

B5 = 9600

B6 = 19.2

B7** = 38.4

S0 = one stop bit

S1 = two stop bits

P0 = no parity

P1 = even

P2 = odd

D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

524* Display appended info status* IDAP T0 D0 Xx

T0 = time not appended

T1* = time appended *

D0 = date not appended

D1* = date appended*

X0 = aux info not appended

X1 = aux info appended

525* Display comm protocol* ECPS Px Txx Xx S0

P0 = basic

P1 = ECP

P2 = echo Inquiry

Txx = ECP timeout

ms = 50 * xx

FF = disabled ECP timeout

X0 = no flow control

X1 = software flow control

X2 = hardware flow control

S0 = som character is #

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-9

526 Display I/O status IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs

C1 = predefined output mode

O0 = both outputs off

O1 = output0 on

O2 = output1 on

O3 = both outputs on

I0 = both inputs false

I1 = input0 true

I2 = input1 true

I3 = both inputs true

D0 - DF = output pulse duration

D0 to D8: 48 ms (ID, IATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)

130 ms (ATA single mode)

D9: 60 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

140 ms (ATA single mode)

DA: 76 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

190 ms (ATA single mode)

DB: 152 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

300 ms (ATA single mode)

DC: 228 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes) (factory

default);

450 ms (ATA single mode)

DD: 300 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

550 ms (ATA single mode)

DE: 376 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

700 ms (ATA single mode)

DF: 752 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

1300ms (ATA single mode)

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-10

527** Display RF status RFST Cx Ox T1 Fxx Rxx

C0 = RF controlled by host

C1 = RF-by-input control

O0 = RF off

O1 = RF on

T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2 min

Fxx = RF output frequency, 00 to

Rxx** = Tag decoder range

(distance) for ATA tags, xx = 00 to

1F hexadecimal range value

GXX** = Tag decoder range

(distance) for Intellitag tags, 00 to

1F hexadecimal range value

Axx** = RF power attenuation, 00

max to 0A min (10db less than

max)

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-11

529 Display presence input status PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag

reports

P1 = enable presence w/o tag

reports

D0 = min presence true period

of 0 ms

A0 = RF off on timeout

A1 = RF off on timeout or tag

A2 = RF off on timeout or no

presence

T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always

expired)

T1 to T7: RF timeout of 48 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 150 ms (ATA single

mode)

T8: RF timeout of 60 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 175 ms (ATA single

mode)

T9: RF timeout of 92 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 200 ms (ATA single

mode)

TA: RF timeout of 152 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 370 ms (ATA single

mode)

TB: RF timeout of 300 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 680 ms (ATA single

mode)

TC: RF timeout of 452 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1000 ms (ATA

single mode)

TD: RF timeout of 600 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1250 ms (ATA

single mode)

TE: RF timeout of 752 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1500 ms (ATA

single mode)

TF: RF timeout infinite, never

expires (factory default)

I0 = Input inversion disabled

(factory default)

I1 = Input inversion enabled

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-12

530* Display RF0 filter status RF0S Ux V0

U0 = one ID separation

U1 = two ID

U2 = transmit all

V0 = valid ID code criteria of one

acquisition (fixed)

532 Display Wiegand mode status T0F x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

533 Display Wiegand retransmit

interval WTI xx

xx = 01–FF seconds

537 Display echo status ECHO x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

540 Display flash checksum PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

543 Display boot checksum BCKS xxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

560 Display input status change SSTC Ex Mx

E0 = status change reports

disabled

E1 = status change reports

enabled

M0 = no reporting

M1 = report change on input0

M2 = report change on input1

M3 = report change on either

input

570 Display tag mode status IT500:x ATA:x

I = IT500 ID (64 bits)

E = enabled

F = full transaction

D = disabled

M = multi-tag sort enabled

NI = No EAC check

60NN Set reader ID number

NN = 00–FF

(00 = factory default)

Done

610 Select basic protocol Done or Error

611 Select ECP protocol Done or Error

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-13

612NN Set ECP timeout

NN = 01–FE (1–255)

timeout = 50 ms * NN

(if NN = FF, timeout is

disabled)

Done or Error

612FE Set ECP timeout = 12.7 sec Done or Error

6140 Disable flow control Done

6141 Enable software

flow control Done

6142 Enable hardware flow control Done

6170 Disable echo Done

6171 Enable echo Done or Error

6200 Turn both outputs off Done

6201 Turn output0 on Done

6202 Turn output1 on Done

6203 Turn both outputs on Done

621 Select predefined output mode Done

63 Reset reader Model [model]

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

TransCore

6400 Turn RF off Done

6401 Turn RF on Done

6402* Turns on continuous wave RF

until commands 6400, 6401, or

641 are received by the reader*

Done

641 Select RF-by-input control Done

642NN Set RF operating frequency from

902 to 928 in 500 kHz steps

NN = 01- 34

Caution: in the U.S., authorized

frequency band for Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers is

912.5 to 919 MHz; 64215 to

64222

Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-14

643NN Set ATA operating range

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)

1F = default

Done

644NN** Set attenuation**

NN = 00 to 0A Done

645NN** Set Encompass 4/4800

Multiprotocol Reader operating

range**

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)

Done

65 Reset power fail bit Done

66F Load default operating

parameters Done or Error

67N Set output pulse duration

N = 0–F

(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,

60,76,152,228,300,376, 752 ms)

Done or Error

67C Set output pulse

duration = 228 ms Done or Error

6900 Disable presence

without tag reports Done

6901 Enable presence without

tag reports Done

6920 Turn RF off on timeout Done

6921 Turn RF off on timeout/tag Done

6922 Turn RF off on

timeout/no presence Done

693N Set RF timeout

N = 0–F

(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,

32,48,60,92,152, 300,452,

600,752, infinite)

Done or Error

693F Set RF timeout = infinite Done

6940 Disable input inversion Done

6941 Enable input inversion Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-15

695S...S Set serial number

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 6

characters)

Done

696S...S Store hardware

configuration string

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 20

characters)

Done

820 Disable status change

reports Done

821 Report change on input0 Done

822 Report change on input1 Done

823 Report changes on both Done

830*** Disable automatic periodic RF

status report Done

831*** Enable automatic periodic RF

status report Done or Error

90 Load program block Done, Checksum Error,

Program Error, or Verify Error

91 Verify flash checksum Done or Error

96 Erase flash memory Done

97 Perform destructive flash test Done or Error

99 Exit download mode Model [model]

Ver [ver no.] SN [serial no.]

TransCore

Table D-2 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-16

Alphabetical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-3:

•Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

•Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

•A single asterisk (*) indicates that the command has been altered so that it is dif-

ferent from the AI1620 SmartPass command.

•A double asterisk (**) indicates a new command or added value that is not present

in the AI1620 SmartPass command list.

•A triple asterisk (***) indicates an Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader com-

mand that is supported only in the Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Soft-

ware Version TBD.

The Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader system does not include a real-time

clock. The dual-protocol Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader internal timing var-

ies depending on the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Unless stated otherwise, values listed for timing-related command variables assume

an ID operational tag read mode (read 64-bit ID data from eGo tags, ignore ATA tags)

and an eGo tag in the read field and these values may vary. See Chapter 7, “Com-

mands,” for more information.

Refer to Chapter 7 for the complete syntax of commands and messages.

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically

Command Name Code Reader Message

All IDs transmit 40 Done

Alternative group select

disable 452 Done

Alternative group select enable 453 Done or Error

Alternative fifth group select

disable*** 494*** Done

Alternative fifth group select

enable*** 495*** Done or Error

Alternative fourth group select

disable*** 492*** Done

Alternative fourth group select

enable*** 493*** Done or Error

Command Quick Reference

D-17

Alternative second group

select disable*** 458*** Done

Alternative second group select

enable*** 459*** Done or Error

Alternative third group select

disable*** 490*** Done

Alternative third group select

enable*** 491*** Done or Error

Appended info status display* 524* IDAP T0 D0 Xx

T0 = time not appended

T1 = time appended*

D0 = date not appended

D1 = date appended*

X0 = aux info not appended

X1 = aux info appended

ATA operating range set

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)

1F = default

643NN Done

Automatic periodic RF status

report disable*** 830*** Done

Automatic periodic RF status

report enable*** 831*** Done

Aux info append disable 310 Done or Error

Aux info append enable 311 Done or Error

Basic protocol select 610 Done or Error

Baud rate = 1200 baud set*** 1002*** Done or Error

Baud rate = 19.2 K baud set 1006 Done or Error

Baud rate = 2400 baud set 1003 Done or Error

Baud rate = 38.4 K baud set** 1007** Done or Error

Baud rate = 4800 baud set 1004 Done or Error

Baud rate = 9600 baud set 1005 Done or Error

Boot checksum display 543 BCKS xxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-18

Comm port parameters display* 522* MAIN Bx Sx Px D0

B0 = 110*

B1 = 300*

B2 = 1200*

B3 = 2400

B4 = 4800

B5 = 9600

B6 = 19.2

B7 = 38.4

S0 = one stop bit

S1 = two stop bits

P0 = no parity

P1 = even

P2 = odd

D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

Comm protocol display* 525* ECPS Px Txx Xx S0

P0 = basic

P1 = ECP

P2 = data inquiry

Txx = ECP timeout

ms = 50 * xx

TFF = disabled ECP timeout

X0 = no flow control

X1 = software flow control

X2 = hardware flow control

S0 = SOM character is #

Command mode switch 01 Done

Data mode switch 00 Done

Default operating parameters

load 66F Done or Error

Destructive flash test perform 97 Done or Error

Diagnostic results display 661 DIAG Rx Ex Dx C1

R0 = boot ROM OK

R1 = boot failed

E0 = flash memory OK

E1 = flash failed

D0 = external RAM OK

D1 = RAM failed

C0 = RTC OK*

C1 = RTC failed

Diagnostics perform all

(Use 661 to display diagnostic

results.)

669 Done or Error

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-19

Download mode exit 99 Model [model]

Ver [ver no.] SN [serial no.]

AMTECH

Download mode switch 05 Done

Echo disable 6170 Done

Echo enable 6171 Done or Error

Echo status display 537 ECHO x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

ECP protocol select 611 Done or Error

ECP timeout set = 12.7 sec set 612FE Done or Error

ECP timeout set

NN = 01–FE (1–255)

timeout = 50 ms * NN

(if NN = FF, timeout is disabled)

612NN Done or Error

eGo tag initialization during

multi-tag sort*** 456*** Done or Error

eGo tag initialization during multi-

tag sort*** 457*** Done or Error

Even parity select 1021 Done

Flash checksum display 540 PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Flash checksum verify 91 Done or Error

Flash memory checksum verify 668 Done or Error

Flash memory erase 96 Done

Flow control disable 6140 Done

Flow control enable 6141 Done

Hardware configuration

information display 506 S...S

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of

20 characters)

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-20

Hardware configuration string

store

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 20

characters)

696S...S Done

Hardware flow control enable 6142 Done

I/O status display 526 IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs

C1 = predefined output mode

O0 = both outputs off

O1 = output0 on

O2 = output1 on

O3 = both outputs on

I0 = both inputs false

I1 = input0 true

I2 = input1 true

I3 = both inputs true

D0–DF = output pulse duration

D0 to D8: 48 ms (ID, IATA, Dual

1, and Dual 2 modes)

130 ms (ATA single mode)

D9: 60 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

140 ms (ATA single mode)

DA: 76 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1, and

Dual 2 modes)

190 ms (ATA single mode)

DB: 152 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)

300 ms (ATA single mode)

DC: 228 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)(factory

default);

450 ms (ATA single mode)

DD: 300 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)

550 ms (ATA single mode)

DE: 376 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)

700 ms (ATA single mode)

DF: 752 ms (ID, eATA, Dual 1,

and Dual 2 modes)

1300ms (ATA single mode)

Input inversion disable 6940 Done

Input inversion enable 6941 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-21

Input status change display 560 SSTC Ex Mx

E0 = status change reports

disabled

E1 = status change reports

enabled

M0 = no reporting

M1 = report change on input0

M2 = report change on input1

M3 = report change on either

input

Input0 change report 821 Done

Input1 change report 822 Done

Multi-tag sort disable 454 Done

Multi-tag sort enable 455 Done or Error

Odd parity select 1022 Done

Output pulse duration = 228 ms

set 67C Done or Error

Output pulse duration set

N = 0–F

(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,60,76,

152, 228,300,376,752 ms)

67N Done or Error

Output0 turn on 6201 Done

Output1 turn on 6202 Done

Outputs turn off both 6200 Done

Outputs turn on both 6203 Done

Parity disable 1020 Done

Power fail bit display 520 PWRB Px R0

P0 = no power fail has occurred

P1 = power fail has occurred

Power fail bit reset 65 Done

Predefined output mode select 621 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-22

Presence input status display 529 PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag

reports

P1 = enable presence w/o tag

reports

D0 = min presence true period

of 0 ms

A0 = RF off on timeout

A1 = RF off on timeout or tag

A2 = RF off on timeout or no

presence

T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always

expired)

T1 to T7: RF timeout of 48 ms (ID,

eATA, Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 150 ms (ATA single

mode)

T8: RF timeout of 60 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 175 ms (ATA single

mode)

T9: RF timeout of 92 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 200 ms (ATA single

mode)

TA: RF timeout of 152 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 370 ms (ATA single

mode)

TB: RF timeout of 300 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 680 ms (ATA single

mode)

TC: RF timeout of 452 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1000 ms (ATA single

mode)

TD: RF timeout of 600 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1250 ms (ATA single

mode)

TE: RF timeout of 752 ms (ID, eATA,

Dual 1, and Dual 2 modes);

RF timeout of 1500 ms (ATA single

mode)

TF: RF timeout infinite, never

expires (factory default)

I0 = Input inversion disabled

(factory default)

I1 = Input inversion enabled

Presence without tag reports

disable 6900 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-23

Presence without tag reports

enable 6901 Done

Program block load 90 Done, Checksum Error, Program

Error, or Verify Error

Reader ID number display 521 RDID xx

xx = 00–FF

Reader ID number set

NN = 00-FF

(00 = factory default)

60NN Done

Reader reset 63 Model [model]

Ver [ver no.] SN [serial no.]

AMTECH

Report changes both 823 Done

RF attenuation set** 644NN** Done or Error

RF continuous wave on until

commands 6400, 6401, or 641

are received by reader*

6402* Done

RF off 6400 Done

RF off on timeout 6920 Done

RF off on timeout/no presence 6922 Done

RF off on timeout/tag 6921 Done

RF on 6401 Done

RF on by input control 641 Done

RF operating frequency set from

902 to 928 in 500 kHz steps

NN = 01- 34

Caution: in the U.S., authorized

frequency band for Encompass

4/4800 Multiprotocol Readers is

912.5 to 919 MHz; 64215 to

64222

642NN Done

RF operating range set**

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)

645NN** Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader System Guide

D-24

RF status display** 527** RFST Cx Ox T1 Fxx Rxx

C0 = RF controlled by host

C1 = RF-by-input control

O0 = RF off

O1 = RF on

T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2

min

Fxx = RF output frequency, 00 to

Rxx** = Tag decoder range

(distance) for ATA tags, xx = 00

to 1F hexadecimal range value

GXX** = Tag decoder range

(distance) for Intellitag tags, 00

to 1F hexadecimal range value

Axx** = RF power attenuation,

00 max to 0A min (10db less

than max)

RF timeout = infinite set 693F Done

RF timeout set

N = 0–F

(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,32,

48,60,92,152,300,452,600,752

ms, infinite)

693N Done or Error

RF0 filter status display* 530* RF0S Ux V0

U0 = one ID separation

U1 = two ID

U2 = transmit all

Serial number set

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 6

characters)

695S...S Done

Status change reports disable 820 Done

Stop bit use one 1010 Done

Stop bit use two 1011 Done

Tag ID separation select one 4100 Done

Tag ID separation select two 4101 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4/4800 Multiprotocol Reader Commands Listed

Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-25

Tag mode select**

N = 0–4

0 = Dual (1); eATA (128 bits) and

ATA tags

1 = ATA tags only

2 = eATA ID only (64 bits)

3 = eATA (128 bits) tags only,

default

4 = eATA ID (64 bits) and ATA

TransCore 05531 LMS TRANSMITTER User Manual E4 SG

TransCore LMS TRANSMITTER E4 SG

USERS MANUAL

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation